BIOS Parameters by Server Model

C220 M8 and C240 M8 Servers

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 1. I/O

Name

Description

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

MLOM OptionROM toggle button

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

PCIe Slot Option ROM

PCIe Slotn OptionROM toggle button

Allows you to enable or disable the feature whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM toggle button

Allows you to enable or disable the feature whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

MRAID Link Speed

MRAIDn Link Speed drop-down list

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an MRAID adapter card installed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN4—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

MRAID OptionROM

MRAID OptionROM toggle button

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the MRAID PCIe adapter connected. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the MRAID PCIe adapter.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the MRAID PCIe adapter.

NVME Link Speed

Front NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

Rear NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

Link speed for NVMe rear slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

NVME OptionROM

Front NVME-n OptionROM toggle button

This option allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Rear NVME-n OptionROM toggle button

This option allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the rear SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

VMD Enable toggle button

Intel Volume Management Device (VMD) is for PCIe NVMe SSDs that provides hardware logic to manage and aggregate NVMe SSDs.

This can be one the following:

  • Enabled— Enables benefits like robust surprise hot-plug, status LED management.

  • Disabled— Disables the feature.

Default value: Disabled.

Refer Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU User Guide to configure VMD.

Note

 

VROC is not supported with Cisco UCS C-Series M7 servers.

PCIe RAS Support toggle button

Allows you to enable or disable the feature where PCIe RAS Support is available on the PCIe slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe RAS is not available on the slot.

  • Enabled—PCIe RAS is available on port.

VGA Priority drop-down list

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • On Board—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

  • Off Board—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

  • On Board VGA Disabled—Priority is given to the PCIe Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled. The vKVM does not function when the onboard VGA is disabled.

USB Port Rear toggle button

Allows you to enable or disable the rear panel USB devices. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

IPv6 PXE Support toggle button

Allows you to enable or disable IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • Enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

Network Stack toggle button

Allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • Enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

External SSC enable drop-down list

This option controls the use of an external Secure Socket Controller (SSC) for cryptographic operations, typically in relation to Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionalities.

This can be one of the following:

  • Off

  • OPn_Percent

  • Hardware

IPV4 PXE Support toggle button

Allows you to enable or disable IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

IIO eDPC Support drop-down list

eDPC allows a downstream link to be disabled after an uncorrectable error, making recovery possible in a controlled and robust manner.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—eDPC support is disabled.

  • On Fatal Error—eDPC is enabled only for fatal errors.

  • On Fatal and Non-Fatal Errors—eDPC is enabled for both fatal and non-fatal errors.

IPv4 HTTP Support toggle button

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • Enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

IPv6 HTTP Support toggle button

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • Enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

Re-Size BAR Support toggle button

This feature allows the system to dynamically resize the BAR, providing more flexible and efficient use of memory resources.

  • Disabled—Re-Size BAR Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Re-Size BAR Support is enabled.

PreBoot DMA Protection toggle button

Using this, the server can restrict or control DMA operations during the preboot phase, ensuring that only trusted devices can access system memory.

  • Disabled—Re-Size BAR Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Re-Size BAR Support is enabled.

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 2. BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab

Name

Description

FRB 2 Timer toggle button

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

OS Watchdog Timer toggle button

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • COM 0—Enables console redirection on serial port A during POST.

  • COM 1—Enables console redirection on serial port B during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

PCIe Slots CDN Control drop-down list

set PcieSlotsCdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

CDN Control drop-down list

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Some controllers such as Onboard storage controllers, Emulex FC adapters, and GPU controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

Default value: Enabled

Adaptive Memory Training

When this option is Enabled:

The Memory training will not happen in every boot but the BIOS will use the saved memory training result in every re-boot.

Some exceptions when memory training happens in every boot are:

BIOS update, CMOS reset, CPU or Memory configuration change, SPD or run-time uncorrectable error or the last boot has occurred more than 24 hours before.

When this option is Disabled, the Memory training happens in every boot.

Default value: Enabled.

Note

 

To disable the Fast Boot option, the end user must set the following tokens as mentioned below:

Adaptive Memory Training to Disabled

BIOS Techlog level to Normal

OptionROM Launch Optimization to Disabled.

BIOS Techlog Level

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 3. BIOS Parameters in Security Management Tab

Name

Description

Trusted Platform Module State toggle button

set TPMControl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Security Device Support toggle button

set TpmSupport

You should enable TPM support to enable security device support. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled if TPM is enabled.

SHA256 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA256PCRBank

PCR bank available for OS when BIOS is performing measurements.

  • Disabled—SHA256 PCR Bank is not available for BIOS.

  • Enabled—SHA256 PCR Bank is available for BIOS.

SHA-1 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA1PCRBank

PCR bank available for OS when BIOS is performing measurements.

  • Disabled—SHA-1 PCR Bank is not available for BIOS.

  • Enabled—SHA-1 PCR Bank is available for BIOS.

TPM Pending Operation drop-down list

set TPMPendingOperation

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Pending Operation option allows you to control the status of the pending operation. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No action.

  • TpmClear—Clears the pending operations.

SHA384 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA384PCRBank

The Platform Configuration Register (PCR) is a memory location in the TPM. Multiple PCRs are collectively referred to as a PCR bank. A Secure Hash Algorithm 384-bit or SHA-384PCR Bank allows to enable or disable TPM security.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

Intel Trusted Execution Technology Support toggle button

set TXTSupport

Can be Enabled only when Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is Enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

TPM Minimal Physical Presence toggle button

set TpmPpiRequired

This token allows you to apply recommended Microsoft default settings for TPM.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Total Memory Encryption (TME) toggle button

set EnableTme

Allows you to provide the capability to encrypt the entirety of the physical memory of a system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Power on Password toggle button

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SW Guard Extensions (SGX) toggle button

set EnableSgx

Allows you to enable Software Guard Extensions (SGX) feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Multikey Total Memory Encryption (MK-TME) toggle button

set EnableMktme

MK-TME allows you to have multiple encryption domains with one with own key. Different memory pages can be encrypted with different keys. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Pkg info In-Band Access toggle button

set SgxPackageInfoInBandAccess

Allows you to enable SGX Package Info In-Band Access. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Factory Reset toggle button

set SgxFactoryReset

Allows the system to perform SGX factory reset on subsequent boot. This deletes all registration data. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select Owner EPOCH input type drop-down list

set EpochUpdate

Allows you to change the seed for the security key used for the locked memory region that is created. This can be one of the following:

  • SGX Owner EPOCH activated—Does not change the current input type.

  • SGX Owner EPOCH deactivated—Changes the current input type.

  • Change to New Random Owner EPOCHs—Changes EPOCH to a system generated random number.

  • Manual User Defined Owner EPOCHs—Changes the EPOCH seed to a hexadecimal value that you enter.

SGX QoS toggle button

set SgxQoS

Allows you to enable SGX QoS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Auto MP Registration Agent toggle button

set SgxAutoRegistrationAgent

Allows you to enable the registration authority service to store the platform keys. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Write Enable toggle button

set SgxLeWr

Allows you to enable SGX Write feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SProcessor Epoch n field

set SgxEpoch0

Allows you to define the SGX EPOCH owner value for the EPOCH number designated by n.

SGX PUBKEY HASHn field

set SgxLePubKeyHashn

Allows you to set the Software Guard Extensions (SGX) value. This value can be set between:

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH0—Between 7-0

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH1—Between 15-8

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH2—Between 23-16

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH3—Between 31-24

DMA Control Opt-In Flag toggle button

DMA Control Opt-In Flag - Enabling this token allows the operating system to enable Input Output Memory Management Unit (IOMMU) to prevent the DMA attacks from possible malicious devices.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

LIMIT CPU PA to 46 Bits toggle button

set CpuPaLimit

Enable this option for Intel® VT-d enabling boot to boot with 2019 OS.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

TDX Secure Arbitration Mode (SEAM) Loader: toggle button

set EnableTdxSeamldr

Enable this for a security feature that enables the initialization and management of Intel® Trusted Domain Extensions (TDX) for secure virtualized environments.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Trust Domain Extension (TDX) toggle button

set EnableTdx

Allows you to enhance the security of virtualized environments by creating isolated execution environments, known as Trust Domains, that protect sensitive data and code from other software, including the hypervisor.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 4. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

NUMA toggle button

set NUMAOptimize

Whether the BIOS supports Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select Memory RAS configuration drop-down list

set SelectMemoryRAS

Determines how the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Maximum Performance—System performance is optimized.

  • ADDDC Sparing—Adaptive virtual lockstep is an algorithm implemented in the hardware and firmware to support the ADDDC mode. When selected, the system performance is optimized till the algorithm is activated. The algorithm is activated in case of DRAM device failure. Once the algorithm is activated, the virtual lockstep regions are activated to map out the failed region during run-time dynamically, and the performance impact is restricted at a region level.

  • Mirror Mode 1LM—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

  • Partial Mirror Mode 1LM—Partial DIMM Mirroring creates a mirrored copy of a specific region of memory cells, rather than keeping the complete mirror copy. Partial Mirroring creates a mirrored region in memory map with the attributes of a partial mirror copy. Up to 50% of the total memory capacity can be mirrored, using up to 4 partial mirrors.

Select PPR Type drop-down list

set SelectPprType

Cisco IMC supports Hard-PPR, which permanently remaps accesses from a designated faulty row to a designated spare row.

This can be one of the following:

  • Hard PPR—Support is enabled.

    Note

     

    Hard PPR can be used only when Memory RAS Configuration is set to ADDDC Sparing. For other RAS selections, this setting should be set to Disabled.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

BME DMA Mitigation toggle button

set BmeDmaMitigation

Allows you to disable the PCI BME bit to mitigate the threat from an unauthorized external DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCI BME bit is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCI BME bit is enabled in the BIOS.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Partial Memory Mirror Mode toggle button

set PartialMirrorModeConfig

The partial memory size is either in percentage or in GB. This can be one of the following:

  • Percentage—The partial memory mirror is defined in percentage.

  • Disabled—Partial memory mirror is disabled.

Partial Mirror percentage field

set PartialMirrorPercent

Percentage of memory to mirror above 4GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 50.

Memory Size Limit in GB field

set MemorySizeLimit

Use this option to reduce the size of the physical memory limit in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

CR QoS drop-down list

set CRQoS

Enables you to select the CR QoS tuning.

This can be one of the following:

  • Mode 1

  • Mode 2

  • Mode 0CR QoS feature is disabled.

CR FastGo Config drop-down list

set CrfastgoConfig

Enables you to select CR QoS configuration profiles.

This can be one of the following:

  • Enable Optimization

  • Disable Optimization

  • Auto

Memory Thermal Throttling Mode drop-down list

set MemoryThermalThrottling

This function is used for adjusting memory temperature. If memory temperature is excessively high after the function is enabled, the memory access rate is reduced and Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) adjusts the fan to cool down the memory to avoid any DIMM damage.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • CLTT with PECI—Enables Closed Loop Thermal Throttling with Platform Environment Control Interface.

UMA drop-down list

set UmaBasedClustering

Allows you to set UMA settings. This can be one of the following:

  • Disable(All2All)

  • Hemisphere(2-clusters)

Enhanced Memory Test drop-down list

set AdvancedMemTest

Note

 

This feature is applicable only to Samsung, Hynix and Micron DIMMs.

You can enable advance DIMM testing during BIOS POST using this feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

  • Auto—Automatically determines whether to perform the Enhanced Memory Test based on system conditions and requirements.

Adaptive Refresh Management Level drop-down list

set AdaptiveRefreshMgmtLevel

Refresh management settings are read-only. Adaptive RFM allows the controller flexibility to choose additional RFM threshold settings called RFM levels. The RFM levels permit alignment of the controller-issued RFM commands with the in-DRAM management of these commands.

This can be one of the following:

  • Default

  • Level A

  • Level B

  • Level C

Error Check Scrub drop-down list

set ErrorCheckScrub

You can enable memory check with or without result collection. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled without Result Collection

  • Enabled with Result Collection

Rank Margin Tool toggle button

set EnableRMT

Indicates whether the rank margin tool is used and whether a margin test (which tests the memory sequence and voltage signals) is performed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled

MMIO High Base drop-down list

set MmiohBase

MMIO High Base configures the base address for the high memory-mapped I/O (MMIO) region, which is used to map device memory and I/O resources above the 4GB address space, optimizing system memory allocation and performance.

This can be one of the following:

  • 512G—Sets the MMIO High Base to 512 gigabytes.

  • 1T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 1 terabyte.

  • 2T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 2 terabytes.

  • 4T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 4 terabytes.

  • 16T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 16 terabytes.

  • 24T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 24 terabytes.

  • 32T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 32 terabytes.

  • 40T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 40 terabytes.

  • 56T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 56 terabytes.

  • Auto—The server dynamically sets the High Base value.

MMIO High Granularity Size drop-down list

set MmiohSize

MMIO High Granularity Size configures the granularity of the high memory-mapped I/O (MMIO) region, determining the size increments for allocating MMIO space above the 4GB address range, which helps optimize memory allocation and system performance.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 1 gigabyte.

  • 4G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 4 gigabytes.

  • 16G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 16 gigabytes.

  • 32G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 32 gigabytes.

  • 64G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 64 gigabytes.

  • 256G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 256 gigabytes.

  • 1024G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 1024 gigabytes.

  • Auto—The server dynamically sets the High Granularity Size.

UEFI Memory Map Special Purpose Memory Flag

This setting determines the behavior of the UEFI memory map special knob, which impacts CXL cards under certain operating systems.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled

ACPI SRAT Special Purpose Memory Flag

This setting allows or disallows the ACPI SRAT special purpose memory flag to be set when the UEFI Memory Map special purpose flag is enabled.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled

Runtime Post Package Repair

Enables the soft post-package repairs of the corrected memory errors during OS runtime.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 5. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Description

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher toggle button

set AdjacentCacheLinePrefetch

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even or odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

  • Enabled—The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

Hardware Prefetcher toggle button

set HardwarePrefetch

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

DCU IP Prefetcher toggle button

set DcuIpPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

DCU Streamer Prefetch drop-down list

set DcuStreamerPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

  • Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

Virtual Numa toggle button

set VirtualNuma

Virtual NUMA (virtual non-uniform memory access) is a memory-access optimization method for VMware virtual machines (VMs), which helps prevent memory-bandwidth bottlenecks.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Functionality is disabled.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

CPU Performance drop-down list

set CPUPerformance

Sets the CPU performance profile for the options listed above. This can be one of the following:

  • Enterprise—All options are enabled.

  • HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

  • Hight Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

  • Custom—All performance profile options can be configured from the BIOS setup on the server. In addition, the Hardware Prefetcher and Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch options can be configured as well.

LLC Dead Line drop-down list

set LLCALLoc

In CPU non-inclusive cache scheme, MLC evictions are filled into the LLC. When lines are evicted from the MLC, the core can flag them as dead (not likely to be read again). The LLC has the option to drop dead lines and not fill them in the LLC.

If this feature is disabled, dead lines are always dropped and are never filled into the LLC.

If this feature is enabled, the LLC can fill dead lines into the LLC if there is free space available.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

  • Auto—CPU determines the LLC dead line allocation.

XPT Remote Prefetch drop-down list

set XPTRemotePrefetch

This feature allows an LLC request to be duplicated and sent to an appropriate memory controller in a remote machine based on the recent LLC history to reduce latency.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

  • Auto—CPU determines the functionality.

UPI Link Enablement drop-down list

set UPILinkEnablement

Enables the minimum number of UPI links required by the processor.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1

  • 2

  • 4

  • Auto

Enhanced CPU Performance drop-down list

set EnhancedCPUPerformance

Note

 
Once you enable this functionality, you cannot enable Enable Power Characterization and Power Capping.

Note

 

This option is not availabe on Cisco UCS C220 M8 servers.

Enhances CPU performance by adjusting server settings automatically.

Note

 

Enabling this functionality may increase power consumption.

The server should meet the following requirements in order to use this functionality:

  • Server should not contain Barlow Pass DIMMs

  • DIMM module size present in the Cisco UCS C220 M6 server should be less than 64GB and in Cisco UCS C240 M6 server should be less than 256GB

  • No GPU cards are present in the server.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Allows Cisco IMC to adjust server settings to increase performance.

UPI Power Management toggle button

set UPIPowerManagement

UPI power management is used to conserve power on the server.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Functionality is enabled.

LatencyOptimizedMode_M5 toggle button

This option indicates a mode within the server's BIOS settings that prioritizes reducing latency.

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 6. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Intel Virtualization Technology toggle button

set IntelVT

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Processor C6 Report drop-down list

set ProcessorC6Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C6 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C6 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto

  • Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

  • Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

Processor C1E toggle button

set ProcessorC1E

Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

  • Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

EIST PSD Function drop-down list

set ExecuteDisable

EIST reduces the latency inherent with changing the voltage-frequency pair (P-state), thus allowing those transitions to occur more frequently. This allows for more granular, demand-based switching and can optimize the power-to-performance balance, based on the demands of the applications. This can be one of the following:

  • HW ALL— The processor is coordinates the P-state among logical processors dependencies. The OS keeps the P-state request up to date on all logical processors.

  • SW ALL—The OS Power Manager coordinates the P-state among logical processors with dependencies and initiates the transition on all of those Logical Processors.

Turbo Mode toggle button

set IntelTurboBoostTech

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost Technology if required.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Uncore Frequency Scaling drop-down list

set UFSDisable

This feature allows you configure the scaling of uncore frequency of the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • Mode 0

  • Mode 1

  • Mode 2

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the fixed higher and lower values for Uncore Frequency Scaling.

Boot Performance Mode drop-down list

set BootPerformanceMode

Allows you to select the BIOS performance state that is set before the operating system handoff. This can be one of the following:

  • Max Performance—Processor P-state ratio is maximum

  • Max Efficient—Processor P-state ratio is minimum

Configurable TDP Level drop-down list

set ConfigTDPLevel

Configurable TDP Level feature allows adjustments in processor thermal design power values. By modifying the processor behavior and the performance levels, power consumption of a processor can be configured and TDP can be adjusted as the same time. Hence, a processor operates at higher or lower performance levels, depending on the available cooling capacities and desired power consumption. This can be one of the following:

  • Normal

  • Level 1

  • Level 2

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the values for TDP level.

SpeedStep (Pstates) toggle button

set EnhancedIntelSpeedStep

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor CMCI toggle button

set ProcessorCMCI

Allows the CPU to trigger interrupts on corrected machine check events. The corrected machine check interrupt (CMCI) allows faster reaction than the traditional polling timer. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables CMCI.

  • Enabled—Enables CMCI. This is the default value.

HyperThreading [ALL] toggle button

set IntelHyperThread

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

  • Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

Workload Configuration drop-down list

set WorkLdConfig

This feature allows for workload optimization. The options are Balanced and I/O Sensitive:

  • Balanced

  • IO Sensitive

Cores Enabled drop-down list

set CoreMultiProcessing

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

  • 1 through 48—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

UPI Link Frequency Select drop-down list

set QpiLinkSpeed

Note

 

UPI Link Frequency Select token is not applicable for single socket configuration.

This feature allows you to configure the Intel Ultra Path Interconnect (UPI) link speed between multiple sockets. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—This option configures the optimal link speed automatically.

  • 16 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 16 GT/s.

  • 20 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 20 GT/s.

  • 24 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 24 GT/s.

  • —This option configures the optimal link speed.

UPI Prefetch drop-down list

set KTIPrefetch

UPI prefetch is a mechanism to get the memory read started early on a DDR bus. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The UPI prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

  • Auto —CPU determines the UPI Prefetch mode.

Sub NUMA Clustering drop-down list

set SNC

Whether the CPU supports sub NUMA clustering, in which the tag directory and the memory channel are always in the same region. This can be one of the following:

  • auto — The BIOS determines what Sub NUMA clustering is done.

  • disabled— Sub NUMA clustering does not occur.

  • Enabled— Sub NUMA clustering is enabled.

Power Performance Tuning drop-down list

set PwrPerfTuning

Determines if the BIOS or Operating System can turn on the energy performance bias tuning. The options are BIOS and OS.

  • BIOS—Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

  • OS—Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

  • PECI—Chooses Platform Environmental Control Interface for energy performance tuning.

XPT Prefetch drop-down list

set XPTPrefetch

Whether XPT prefetch is used to enable a read request sent to the last level cache to issue a copy of that request to the memory controller prefetcher. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The CPU does not use the XPT Prefetch option.

  • enabled—The CPU enables the XPT prefetch option.

Package C State

set PackageCstateLimit

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

  • no-limit—The server may enter any available C state.

  • auto —The CPU determines the physical elevation.

  • —The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C1 option. This requires less power than C1 or C0, but it takes the server slightly longer to return to high performance mode.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

Energy Performance Bias Config drop-down list

set CpuEngPerfBias

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • — The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with maximum power to keep reduce power consumption.

Hardware P-States drop-down list

set CpuHWPM

Enables processor Hardware P-State. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—HWPM is disabled.

  • hwpm-native-mode—HWPM native mode is enabled.

  • hwpm-oob-mode—HWPM Out-Of-Box mode is enabled.

  • Native Mode with no Legacy (only GUI)

LLC Prefetch toggle button

set LLCPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the LLC Prefetch mechanism to fetch the date into the LLC. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The LLC prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Energy Efficient Turbo toggle button

set EnergyEfficientTurbo

When energy efficient turbo is enabled, the optimal turbo frequency of the CPU turns dynamic based on CPU utilization. The power/performance bias setting also influences energy efficient turbo. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is disabled.

  • Enabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is enabled.

Patrol Scrub drop-down list

set PatrolScrub

Allows the system to actively search for, and correct, single bit memory errors even in unused portions of the memory on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The system checks for memory ECC errors only when the CPU reads or writes a memory address.

  • Enable at End of POST—The system checks for memory ECC errors after BIOS POST.

Processor EPP Profile drop-down list

set EPPProfile

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • Performance

  • Balanced Performance

  • Balanced Power

  • Power

Intel Dynamic Speed Select toggle button

set IntelDynamicSpeedSelect

Intel Dynamic Speed Select modes allow you to run the CPU with different speed and cores in auto mode. This can be one of the following:

  • DisabledIntel Dynamic Speed Select is disabled.

  • EnabledIntel Dynamic Speed Select is enabled.

Intel Speed Select drop-down list

set IntelSpeedSelect

Intel Speed Select modes allows you to run the CPU with different speed and cores.

This can be one of the following:

  • Auto

  • Level 1 to 4

IOAT Configuration toggle button

set IOATConfigCpm

IOAT Configuration enables or disables Intel I/O Acceleration Technology (IOAT), which improves data transfer efficiency and reduces CPU overhead by offloading memory copy operations. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the feature.

  • Enabled—Enables the feature.

PRMRR Size drop-down list

set PrmrrSize

PRMRR Size configures the size of the Protected Range Memory Region Register (PRMRR), which is used to define protected memory regions for enhanced security and isolation in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • 128MB—Defines a 128 megabyte protected memory region.

  • 256MB—Defines a 256 megabyte protected memory region.

  • 512MB—Defines a 512 megabyte protected memory region.

  • 1GB—Defines a 1 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 2GB—Defines a 2 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 4GB—Defines a 4 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 8GB—Defines an 8 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 16GB—Defines a 16 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 32GB—Defines a 32 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 64GB—Defines a 64 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 128GB—Defines a 128 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 256GB—Defines a 256 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 512GB—Defines a 512 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • Invalid Config.—Indicates an invalid configuration for the protected memory region.

  • Auto—Automatically configures the protected memory region size based on system requirements.

C225 M8 Servers

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 7. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Description

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

MLOM OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

PCIe Slot MSTOR Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDLinkSpeed

Link speed for PCIe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

PCI Slotn OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MRAID Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDnLinkSpeed

RAID IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

MRAID OptionROM

set PcieSlotMRAIDnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the RAID Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

Front NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenLinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

Front NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

VGA Priority drop-down list

set VgaPriority

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • OnBoard—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

  • OffBoard—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

  • OnBoard VGA Disabled—Priority is given to the PCIe Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled. The vKVM does not function when the onboard VGA is disabled.

IPv4 PXE Support toggle button

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

IPv6 PXE Support toggle button

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

SR-IOV Support toggle button

set SrIov

SR-IOV feature allows a PCIe device to appear to be multiple separate physical PCIe devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—SR-IOV feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—SR-IOV feature is enabled.

PCIe ARI Support drop-down list

set PcieARISupport

Whether PCI Alternative Routing ID Interpretation (ARI) support in Windows is enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—ARI support is set to auto controlled by the system.

  • disabled—ARI support is not available.

  • enabled—ARI support is always available.

Re-Size BAR Support toggle button

This feature allows the system to dynamically resize the BAR, providing more flexible and efficient use of memory resources.

  • Disabled—Re-Size BAR Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Re-Size BAR Support is enabled.

IPv4 HTTP Support toggle button

set IPV4HTTP

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

IPv6 HTTP Support toggle button

set IPV6HTTP

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

IIO eDPC Support drop-down list

set EdpEn

eDPC allows a downstream link to be disabled after an uncorrectable error, making recovery possible in a controlled and robust manner.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—eDPC support is disabled.

  • On Fatal and Non-Fatal Errors—eDPC is enabled for both fatal and non-fatal errors.

PCIe Ten Bit Tag Support field

set CbsGnbDbgPcieTbtSupport

Enables PCIe ten bit tags for supported devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is enabled in the BIOS.

Network Stack drop-down list

set NetworkStack

This option allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

Table 8. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

MLOM OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

MRAID1 OptionROM

set PcieSlotMRAIDnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the RAID Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MRAID1 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDnLinkSpeed

RAID IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

MRAID2 OptionROM

set PcieSlotMRAIDnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the RAID Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MRAID2 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDnLinkSpeed

RAID IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

Front NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenLinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

PCIe Slot MSTOR Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDLinkSpeed

Link speed for PCIe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

IPV4 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

PCIe ARI Support drop-down list

set PcieARISupport

Whether PCI Alternative Routing ID Interpretation (ARI) support in Windows is enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—ARI support is set to auto controlled by the system.

  • disabled—ARI support is not available.

  • enabled—ARI support is always available.

SR-IOV Support drop-down list

set SrIov

SR-IOV feature allows a PCIe device to appear to be multiple separate physical PCIe devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—SR-IOV feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—SR-IOV feature is enabled.

IPv6 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV6HTTP

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

IPv4 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV4HTTP

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

IIO eDPC Support drop-down list

set EdpEn

eDPC allows a downstream link to be disabled after an uncorrectable error, making recovery possible in a controlled and robust manner.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—eDPC support is disabled.

  • On Fatal and Non-Fatal Errors—eDPC is enabled for both fatal and non-fatal errors.

PCIe Ten Bit Tag Support field

set CbsGnbDbgPcieTbtSupport

Enables PCIe ten bit tags for supported devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is enabled in the BIOS.

Network Stack drop-down list

set NetworkStack

This option allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 9. BIOS Parameters in Server Management

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

FRB 2 Timer toggle button

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

OS Watchdog Timer toggle button

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • COM 0—Enables console redirection on COM 1 during POST.

  • COM 1—Enables console redirection on COM 1 during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

CDN Control toggle button

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

PCIe Slots CDN Control toggle button

set PcieSlotsCdnEnable

Note

 

This option is available on Cisco UCS C225 and C245 M8 servers.

This option is available on Cisco UCS C245 M6 servers equipped with Mellanox cards in slots 2 or 5.

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

BIOS Techlog Level

set CiscoDebugLevel

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

set CiscoOpromLaunchOptimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Some controllers such as Onboard storage controllers, Emulex FC adapters, and GPU controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 10. BIOS Parameters in Security Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Security Device Support toggle button

This option allows you to control the Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The option is disabled.

  • Enabled—The server is disabled.

Trusted Platform Module State toggle button

set TPMControl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

SHA-1 PCR Bank toggle button

set SHA1PCRBank

Enable or Disable SHA-1 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

SHA256 PCR Bank toggle button

set SHA256PCRBank

Enable or Disable SHA256 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

SHA384 PCR Bank toggle button

set SHA384PCRBank

Enable or Disable SHA384 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

TPM Pending Operation drop-down list

set TPMPendingOperation

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Pending Operation option allows you to control the status of the pending operation. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No action.

  • TpmClear—Clears the pending operations.

Power ON Password drop-down list

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 11. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Above 4G Decoding toggle button

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

NUMA Nodes per Socket drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnDramNps

Allows you to configure the memory NUMA domains per socket. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Number of channels is set to auto.

  • NPS0—One NUMA node per system.

  • NPS1—One NUMA node per socket.

  • NPS2—Two NUMA nodes per socket, one per Left/Right Half of the SoC.

  • NPS4—Four NUMA nodes per socket, one per Quadrant.

Chipselect Interleaving drop-down list

set CbsCmnMemMapBankInterleaveDdr4

Whether memory blocks across the DRAM chip selects for node 0 are interleaved. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Chip selects are not interleaved within the memory controller.

  • Auto—The CPU automatically determines how to interleave chip selects.

Bank Group Swap

set CbsCmnMemCtrlBankGroupSwapDdr4

Determines how physical addresses are assigned to applications. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU automatically determines how to assign physical addresses to applications.

  • Disabled—Bank group swap is not used.

  • Enabled—Bank group swap is used to improve the performance of applications.

IOMMU drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbNbIOMMU

Input Output Memory Management Unit (IOMMU) allows AMD processors to map virtual addresses to physical addresses. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines how map these addresses.

  • Disabled—IOMMU is not used.

  • Enabled—Address mapping takes place through the IOMMU.

SMEE drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuSmee

Whether the processor uses the Secure Memory Encryption Enable (SMEE) function, which provides memory encryption support. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines how map these addresses.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the SMEE function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the SMEE function.

TSME drop-down list

set TSME

Allows you to enable Transparent Secure Memory Encryption (TSME). This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Feature usage is set to auto.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the TSME function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the TSME function.

SEV-SNP Support drop-down list

set CbsSevSnpSupport

Allows you to enable Secure Nested Paging feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the SEV-SNP function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the SEV-SNP function.

SNP Memory Coverage drop-down list

set CbsDbgCpuSnpMemCover

Allows you to configure SNP memory coverage. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—System decides the memory coverage.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use this function.

  • Enabled—This feature is enabled.

  • Custom—Custom size can be defined in SNP Memory Size to Cover.

SNP Memory Size to Cover in MB (0 - 1048576 MB) field

set CbsDbgCpuSnpMemSizeCover

Allows you to configure SNP memory size.

Enter the value in the range (0 - 1048576 MB).

BME DMA Mitigation toggle button

set BmeDmaMitigation

Allows you to disable the PCI BME bit to mitigate the threat from an unauthorized external DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCI BME bit is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCI BME bit is enabled in the BIOS.

Post Package Repair field

set PostPackageRepair

Cisco IMC supports Hard-PPR, which permanently remaps accesses from a designated faulty row to a designated spare row. This can be one of the following:

  • Hard PPR—Support is enabled.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

Runtime Post Package Repairtoggle button

This is a specific configuration setting related to the system's ability to perform repairs on the processor's package during runtime.

  • disabled—The processor does not use the function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the function.

Burst and Postponed Refresh toggle button

set BurstAndPostponedRefresh

This option relates to memory refresh operations and affect the way the system handles memory refresh cycles, which are necessary to maintain data integrity in DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory).

  • disabled—The processor does not use the function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the function.

DRAM Scrub Time field

set CbsDfCmnDramScrubTime

Select a value to indicate the number of hours to scrub the entire memory. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto — Feature is set to auto mode.

  • Disabled — Support is disabled.

  • 1 hour

  • 4 hours

  • 8 hours

  • 16 hours

  • 24 hours

  • 48 hours

SEV-ES ASID Space Limit

The SEV-ES ASID Space Limit BIOS setting determines the number of ASIDs for AMD® SEV-ES, affecting VM memory encryption and isolation. Adjusting it balances security needs with system resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1007.

Memory Interleaving field

set CbsDfCmnMemIntlvControl

Allows for disabling memory interleaving. Note that NUMA nodes per socket will be honored regardless of this setting. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Feature is set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

Memory Refresh Rate field

set MemoryRefreshRate

Controls the refresh rate of the memory controller and might affect the memory performance and power depending on memory configuration and workload. This can be one of the following:

  • 1x Refresh

  • 2x Refresh

Enhanced Memory Test drop-down list

set EnhancedMemoryTest

This feature is applicable only to Samsung, Hynix and Micron DIMMs.

You can enable advance DIMM testing during BIOS POST using this feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Feature is set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is disabled.

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 12. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Core Performance Boost drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuCpb

Whether the AMD processor increases its frequency on some cores when it is idle or not being used much. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to boost performance.

  • disabled—Core performance boost is disabled.

Global C-state Control drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuGlobalCstateCtrl

Whether the AMD processors control IO-based C-state generation and DF C-states This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to control IO-based C-state generation.

  • disabled—Global C-state control is disabled.

  • enabled—Global C-state control is enabled.

L1 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuL1StreamHwPrefetcher

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L1 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

L2 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuL2StreamHwPrefetcher

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L2 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Determinism Slider drop-down list

set CbsCmnDeterminismSlider

Allows AMD processors to determine how to operate. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default power determinism settings.

  • performance—Processor operates at the best performance in a consistent manner.

  • power—Processor operates at the maximum allowable performance on a per die basis.

CPPC drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbSMUCPPC

Allows you to configure Collaborative Processor Performance Control.

This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default CPPC settings.

  • disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • enabled—Collaborative Processor Performance is enabled.

Power Profile Selection F19h drop-down list

The Power Profile Selection F19h BIOS setting allows you to choose a predefined power management profile tailored for specific performance or energy efficiency goals on AMD® Family 19h processors. This setting optimizes the CPU power consumption and performance characteristics based on the selected profile.

This can be one of the following:

  • —High Performance mode is enabled.

  • —Efficiency mode is enabled.

  • —Maximum IO Performance mode is enabled.

  • —Balanced Memory Performance mode is enabled.

Enhanced CPU Performance drop-down list

Note

 
Once you enable this functionality, you cannot enable Enable Power Characterization and Power Capping.

Enhances CPU performance by adjusting server settings automatically.

Note

 

Enabling this functionality may increase power consumption.

The server should meet the following requirements in order to use this functionality:

  • Server should not contain Barlow Pass DIMMs

  • DIMM module size present in the server should be less than 64GB

  • No GPU cards are present in the server.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Allows Cisco IMC to adjust server settings to increase performance.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the configuration of the server.


Table 13. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

SVM Mode toggle button

set SvmMode

Whether the processor uses AMD Secure Virtual Machine Technology. This can be one of the following: This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not use SVM Technology.

  • enabled—The processor uses SVM Technology.

SMT Mode drop-down list

set CbsCpuSmtCtrl

Whether the processor uses AMD Simultaneous MultiThreading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

  • disabled—The processor does not use SMT Mode.

  • enabled—The processor uses SMT Mode.

CPU Downcore control F19 M10h-1Fh drop-down list

The ability to remove one or more cores from operation is supported in the silicon. It may be desirable to reduce the number of cores due to OS restrictions, or power reduction requirements of the system. This item allows the control of how many cores are running. This setting can only reduce the number of cores from those available in the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how many cores need to be enabled.

  • One (1+0)—One cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TWO (2+0)—Two cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • THREE (3+0)—Three cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOUR (4+0)—Four cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • Five (5+0)—Five cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SIX (6+0)—Six cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SEVEN (7+0)—Seven cores enabled on one CPU complex.

Downcore control F19 MA0h-AFh drop-down list

Allows the AMD processors to disable cores and, thus, select how many cores to enable. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how many cores need to be enabled.

  • TWO (1+1)—Two cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOUR (2+2)—Four cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SIX (3+3)—Six cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • EIGHT (4+4)—Eight cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TEN (5+5)—Ten cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TWELVE (6+6)—Twelve cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOURTEEN (7+7)—Fourteen cores enabled on one CPU complex.

Fixed SOC P-State SP5 F19h (0 - 2 P State) drop-down list

set CbsCmnFixedSocPstate

This option defines the target PState when APBDIS is set. Px – Specify a valid PState for the processor installed. This can be one of the following:

  • P0

  • P1

  • P2

  • P3

  • Auto

APBDIS drop-down list

set CbsCmnApbdis

Allows you to select the APB Disable value for the SMU. This can be one of the following:

  • 0—Clear ApbDis to SMU

  • 1—Set ApbDis to SMU.

  • auto—The CPU determines the value.

CCD Control drop-down list

set CbsCpuCcdCtrlSsp

Allows you to specify the number of CCDs that are desired to be enable in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The maximum CCDs provided by the processor is enabled.

  • 2 CCDs

  • 3 CCDs

  • 4 CCDs

  • 6 CCDs

Streaming Stores Control drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuStreamingStoresCtrl

Enables the streaming stores functionality. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

ACPI SRAT L3 Cache As NUMA Domain drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnAcpiSratL3Numa

Creates a layer of virtual domains on top of the physical domains in which each CCX is declared to be in its on domain. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Use NPS settings for domain configuration.

  • Enabled— Each CCX is declared to be in its own domain.

DF C-States drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbSMUDfCstates

When long duration idleness is expected in a system, this control allows the system to transition into a DF Cstate which can set the system into an even lower power state. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Long periods of idleness are not expected so no power savings would be achieved.

  • Enabled— This option is active, saving power when the system is very idle.

Local APIC Mode drop-down list

set CbsDbgCpuLApicMode

This control selects the APIC mode to be used.

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Compatibility—Set to Compatibility mode.

  • XAPIC—Set to XAPIC mode.

  • X2APIC—Set to X2APIC mode.

4-link xGMI max speed

This setting allows you to manually specify the number of lanes used for the xGMI (Inter-chip Global Memory Interconnect) link, which can impact the bandwidth and performance of the data transfer between CPUs. Adjusting this setting can be used for troubleshooting, performance tuning, or to ensure compatibility with certain workloads or system configurations.

This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • 20Gbps—Set to 20Gbps.

  • 25Gbps—Set to 25Gbps.

  • 32Gbps—Set to 32Gbps.

DF PState Frequency Optimizer

Enable or disable DF PState Frequency Optimizer. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

AVX512

The AVX512 BIOS setting enables or disables the use of AVX512 instruction set extensions, which are advanced vector extensions used by certain Intel® processors to improve performance for heavy computational tasks Adjusting this setting can affect compatibility and stability with some software, as well as influence CPU power consumption and heat output. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

Power Down Enable

This setting controls whether the memory (RAM) can enter a low power state when the system is idle or during periods of low usage. Enabling this setting typically allows the RAM to consume less power, potentially saving energy and reducing heat output, while disabling it keeps the RAM fully powered for possibly quicker wake-up times at the expense of higher power consumption. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

xGMI Force Link Width

This setting allows users to manually specify the number of lanes used for the xGMI (Inter-chip Global Memory Interconnect) link, which can impact the bandwidth and performance of the data transfer between CPUs. Adjusting this setting can be used for troubleshooting, performance tuning, or to ensure compatibility with certain workloads or system configurations.

This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • 0—Set to 0.

  • 1—Set to 1.

  • 2—Set to 2.

C245 M8 Servers

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 14. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

MLOM OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

MRAID1 OptionROM

set PcieSlotMRAIDnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the RAID Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MRAID1 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDnLinkSpeed

RAID IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

MRAID2 OptionROM

set PcieSlotMRAIDnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the RAID Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MRAID2 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDnLinkSpeed

RAID IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

Front NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenLinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

PCIe Slot MSTOR Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDLinkSpeed

Link speed for PCIe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

IPV4 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

PCIe ARI Support drop-down list

set PcieARISupport

Whether PCI Alternative Routing ID Interpretation (ARI) support in Windows is enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—ARI support is set to auto controlled by the system.

  • disabled—ARI support is not available.

  • enabled—ARI support is always available.

SR-IOV Support drop-down list

set SrIov

SR-IOV feature allows a PCIe device to appear to be multiple separate physical PCIe devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—SR-IOV feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—SR-IOV feature is enabled.

IPv6 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV6HTTP

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

IPv4 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV4HTTP

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

PCIe Ten Bit Tag Support field

set CbsGnbDbgPcieTbtSupport

Enables PCIe ten bit tags for supported devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is enabled in the BIOS.

Network Stack drop-down list

set NetworkStack

This option allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 15. BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

OS Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • COM 0—Enables console redirection on COM 1 during POST.

  • COM 1—Enables console redirection on COM 1 during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

PCIe Slots CDN Control drop-down list

set PcieSlotsCdnEnable

Note

 

This option is available only on Cisco UCS C245 M6 servers equipped with Mellanox cards in slots 2 or 5.

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

CDN Control drop-down list

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

set CiscoOpromLaunchOptimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Some controllers such as Onboard storage controllers, Emulex FC adapters, and GPU controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

BIOS Techlog Level

set CiscoDebugLevel

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 16. BIOS Parameters in Security Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Security Device Support

This option allows you to control the Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The option is disabled.

  • Enabled—The server is disabled.

Trusted Platform Module State drop-down list

set TPMControl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

SHA-1 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA1PCRBank

Enable or Disable SHA-1 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

SHA256 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA256PCRBank

Enable or Disable SHA256 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

SHA384 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA384PCRBank

The Platform Configuration Register (PCR) is a memory location in the TPM. Multiple PCRs are collectively referred to as a PCR bank. A Secure Hash Algorithm 384-bit or SHA-384PCR Bank allows to enable or disable TPM security.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

Power ON Password drop-down list

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 17. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

NUMA Nodes per Socket drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnDramNps

Allows you to configure the memory NUMA domains per socket. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Number of channels is set to auto.

  • NPS0—One NUMA node per system.

  • NPS1—One NUMA node per socket.

  • NPS2—Two NUMA nodes per socket, one per Left/Right Half of the SoC.

  • NPS4—Four NUMA nodes per socket, one per Quadrant.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

BankGroupSwap

set CbsCmnMemCtrlBankGroupSwapDdr4

Determines how physical addresses are assigned to applications. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU automatically determines how to assign physical addresses to applications.

  • Disabled—Bank group swap is not used.

  • Enabled—Bank group swap is used to improve the performance of applications.

Chipselect Interleaving drop-down list

set CbsCmnMemMapBankInterleaveDdr4

Whether memory blocks across the DRAM chip selects for node 0 are interleaved. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Chip selects are not interleaved within the memory controller.

  • Auto—The CPU automatically determines how to interleave chip selects.

IOMMU drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbNbIOMMU

Input Output Memory Management Unit (IOMMU) allows AMD processors to map virtual addresses to physical addresses. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines how map these addresses.

  • Disabled—IOMMU is not used.

  • Enabled—Address mapping takes place through the IOMMU.

TSME drop-down list

set TSME

Allows you to enable Transparent Secure Memory Encryption (TSME). This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Feature usage is set to auto.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the TSME function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the TSME function.

SMEE drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuSmee

Whether the processor uses the Secure Memory Encryption Enable (SMEE) function, which provides memory encryption support. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines how map these addresses.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the SMEE function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the SMEE function.

SNP Memory Coverage drop-down list

set CbsDbgCpuSnpMemCover

Allows you to configure SNP memory coverage. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—System decides the memory coverage.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use this function.

  • Enabled—This feature is enabled.

  • Custom—Custom size can be defined in SNP Memory Size to Cover.

SEV-SNP Support drop-down list

set CbsSevSnpSupport

Allows you to enable Secure Nested Paging feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the SEV-SNP function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the SEV-SNP function.

BME DMA Mitigation drop-down list

set BmeDmaMitigation

Allows you to disable the PCI BME bit to mitigate the threat from an unauthorized external DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCI BME bit is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCI BME bit is enabled in the BIOS.

SNP Memory Size to Cover in MB field

set CbsDbgCpuSnpMemSizeCover

Allows you to configure SNP memory size.

Enter the value in the range (0 - 1048576 MB).

Burst and Postponed Refresh field

set BurstAndPostponedRefresh

  • disabled—The processor does not use the function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the function.

Post Package Repair field

set PostPackageRepair

Cisco IMC supports Hard-PPR, which permanently remaps accesses from a designated faulty row to a designated spare row. This can be one of the following:

  • Hard PPR—Support is enabled.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

DRAM Scrub Time field

set CbsDfCmnDramScrubTime

Select a value to indicate the number of hours to scrub the entire memory. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto — Feature is set to auto mode.

  • Disabled — Support is disabled.

  • 1 hour

  • 4 hours

  • 8 hours

  • 16 hours

  • 24 hours

  • 48 hours

SEV-ES ASID Space Limit

SEV-ES ASID Space Limit BIOS setting determines the number of ASIDs for AMD® SEV-ES, affecting VM memory encryption and isolation. Adjusting it balances security needs with system resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1007.

Enter the value for the SEV-ES ASID Space Limit field.

Memory Refresh Rate field

set MemoryRefreshRate

Controls the refresh rate of the memory controller and might affect the memory performance and power depending on memory configuration and workload. This can be one of the following:

  • 1x Refresh

  • 2x Refresh

Memory Interleaving field

set CbsDfCmnMemIntlvControl

Allows for disabling memory interleaving. Note that NUMA nodes per socket will be honored regardless of this setting. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Feature is set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 18. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Core Performance Boost drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuCpb

Whether the AMD processor increases its frequency on some cores when it is idle or not being used much. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to boost performance.

  • disabled—Core performance boost is disabled.

Global C-state Control drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuGlobalCstateCtrl

Whether the AMD processors control IO-based C-state generation and DF C-states This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to control IO-based C-state generation.

  • disabled—Global C-state control is disabled.

  • enabled—Global C-state control is enabled.

L1 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuL1StreamHwPrefetcher

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L1 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

L2 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuL2StreamHwPrefetcher

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L2 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Determinism Slider drop-down list

set CbsCmnDeterminismSlider

Allows AMD processors to determine how to operate. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default power determinism settings.

  • performance—Processor operates at the best performance in a consistent manner.

  • power—Processor operates at the maximum allowable performance on a per die basis.

CPPC drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbSMUCPPC

Allows you to configure Collaborative Processor Performance Control.

This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default CPPC settings.

  • disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • enabled—Collaborative Processor Performance is enabled.

Power Profile Selection F19h drop-down list

Power Profile Selection F19h BIOS setting allows you to choose a predefined power management profile tailored for specific performance or energy efficiency goals on AMD® Family 19h processors.

This setting optimizes the CPU power consumption and performance characteristics based on the selected profile.

This can be one of the following:

  • —High Performance mode is enabled.

  • —Efficiency mode is enabled.

  • —Maximum IO Performance mode is enabled.

  • —Balanced Memory Performance mode is enabled.

  • —Balanced Core Performance Mode is enabled.

  • —Balanced Core Memory Performance Mode is enabled.

  • —The CPU automatically uses default settings.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 19. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

SVM Mode drop-down list

set SvmMode

Whether the processor uses AMD Secure Virtual Machine Technology. This can be one of the following: This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not use SVM Technology.

  • enabled—The processor uses SVM Technology.

SMT Mode drop-down list

set CbsCpuSmtCtrl

Whether the processor uses AMD Simultaneous MultiThreading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

  • disabled—The processor does not use SMT Mode.

  • enabled—The processor uses SMT Mode.

Downcore control F19 MA0h-AFh drop-down list

Allows the AMD processors to disable cores and, thus, select how many cores to enable. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how many cores need to be enabled.

  • TWO (1+1)—Two cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOUR (2+2)—Four cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SIX (3+3)—Six cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • EIGHT (4+4)—Eight cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TEN (5+5)—Ten cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TWELVE (6+6)—Twelve cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOURTEEN (7+7)—Fourteen cores enabled on one CPU complex.

ccd

CPU Downcore control F19 M10h-1Fh drop-down list

The ability to remove one or more cores from operation is supported in the silicon. It may be desirable to reduce the number of cores due to OS restrictions, or power reduction requirements of the system. This item allows the control of how many cores are running. This setting can only reduce the number of cores from those available in the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how many cores need to be enabled.

  • One (1+0)—One cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TWO (2+0)—Two cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • THREE (3+0)—Three cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOUR (4+0)—Four cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • Five (5+0)—Five cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SIX (6+0)—Six cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SEVEN (7+0)—Seven cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • EIGHT (8 + 0)—Eight cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • NINE (9 + 0)—Nine cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TEN (10 + 0)—Ten cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • ELEVEN (11 + 0)—Eleven cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TWELVE (12 + 0) —Twelve cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • THIRTEEN (13 + 0)—Thirteen cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOURTEEN (14 + 0)—Fourteen cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FIFTEEN (15 + 0)—Fifteen cores enabled on one CPU complex.

Fixed SOC P-State SP5 F19h drop-down list

set CbsCmnFixedSocPstate

This option defines the target PState when APBDIS is set. Px – Specify a valid PState for the processor installed. This can be one of the following:

  • P0

  • P1

  • P2

  • P3

  • Auto

APBDIS drop-down list

set CbsCmnApbdis

Allows you to select the APB Disable value for the SMU. This can be one of the following:

  • 0—Clear ApbDis to SMU

  • 1—Set ApbDis to SMU.

  • auto—The CPU determines the value.

CCD Control drop-down list

set CbsCpuCcdCtrlSsp

Allows you to specify the number of CCDs that are desired to be enable in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The maximum CCDs provided by the processor is enabled.

  • 2 CCDs

  • 3 CCDs

  • 4 CCDs

  • 6 CCDs

  • 8 CCDs

  • 10 CCDs

  • 12 CCDs

  • 14 CCDs

ACPI SRAT L3 Cache As NUMA Domain drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnAcpiSratL3Numa

Creates a layer of virtual domains on top of the physical domains in which each CCX is declared to be in its on domain. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Use NPS settings for domain configuration.

  • Enabled— Each CCX is declared to be in its own domain.

Streaming Stores Control drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuStreamingStoresCtrl

Enables the streaming stores functionality. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

Local APIC Mode drop-down list

set CbsDbgCpuLApicMode

This control selects the APIC mode to be used.

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Compatibility—Set to Compatibility mode.

  • XAPIC—Set to XAPIC mode.

  • X2APIC—Set to X2APIC mode.

DF C-States drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbSMUDfCstates

When long duration idleness is expected in a system, this control allows the system to transition into a DF Cstate which can set the system into an even lower power state. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Long periods of idleness are not expected so no power savings would be achieved.

  • Enabled— This option is active, saving power when the system is very idle.

4-link xGMI max speed

The option enables xGMI link speed.

This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • 20Gbps—Set to 20Gbps.

  • 25Gbps—Set to 25Gbps.

  • 32Gbps—Set to 32Gbps.

AVX512

AVX512 BIOS setting enables or disables the use of AVX512 instruction set extensions, which are advanced vector extensions used by certain Intel® processors to improve performance for heavy computational tasks.

Adjusting this setting can affect compatibility and stability with some software, as well as influence CPU power consumption and heat output.

Enable or disable AVX512. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

DF PState Frequency Optimizer

Enable or disable DF PState Frequency Optimizer. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

xGMI Force Link Width

This setting allows you to manually specify the number of lanes used for the xGMI (Inter-chip Global Memory Interconnect) link, which can impact the bandwidth and performance of the data transfer between CPUs. Adjusting this setting can be used for troubleshooting, performance tuning, or to ensure compatibility with certain workloads or system configurations.

This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • 0—Set to 0.

  • 1—Set to 1.

  • 2—Set to 2.

Power Down Enable

This setting controls whether the memory (RAM) can enter a low power state when the system is idle or during periods of low usage.

Enabling this setting typically allows the RAM to consume less power, potentially saving energy and reducing heat output, while disabling it keeps the RAM fully powered for possibly quicker wake-up times at the expense of higher power consumption. This can be one of the following:

This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

C220 M7 and C240 M7 Servers

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 20. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

MLOM OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN4—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

MRAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the MRAID PCIe adapter connected. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the MRAID PCIe adapter.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the MRAID PCIe adapter.

MRAID Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an MRAID adapter card installed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN4—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN5

Front NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenLinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

  • GEN5—Link speed can reach up to fifth generation.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

Intel VTD Coherency Support drop-down list

set CoherencySupport

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Coherency. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support coherency.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Coherency as required.

Intel VT for Directed IO drop-down list

set IntelVTD

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Note

 

If you change this option, you must power cycle the server before the setting takes effect.

VMD Enable drop-down list

set VMDenable

Intel Volume Management Device (VMD) is for PCIe NVMe SSDs that provides hardware logic to manage and aggregate NVMe SSDs.

This can be one the following:

  • Enabled— Enables benefits like robust surprise hot-plug, status LED management.

  • Disabled— Disables the feature.

Default value: Disabled.

Refer Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU User Guide to configure VMD.

Note

 

VROC is not supported with Cisco UCS C-Series M7 servers.

PCIe RAS Support drop-down list

set PCIeRASSupport

Whether PCIe RAS Support is available on the PCIe slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe RAS is not available on the slot.

  • Enabled—PCIe RAS is available on port.

USB Port Rear drop-down list

set UsbPortRear

Whether the rear panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

VGA Priority drop-down list

set VgaPriority

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • OnBoard—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

  • OffBoard—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

  • OnBoardDisabled—Priority is given to the PCIe Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled. The vKVM does not function when the onboard VGA is disabled.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

PCIe PLL SSC Percent drop-down list

set PciePllSsc

Enable this feature to reduce EMI interference by down spreading clock 0.5%. Disable this feature to centralize the clock without spreading.

This can be one of the following:

  • auto—EMI interference is auto adjusted.

    Disabled—EMI interference is auto adjusted.

  • ZeroPointFive—EMI interference is reduced by down spreading the clock 0.5%.

Network Stack drop-down list

set NetworkStack

This option allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

IPV4 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

External SSC enable drop-down list

set EnableClockSpreadSpec

This option allows you to reduce the EMI of your motherboard by modulating the signals it generates so that the spikes are reduced to flatter curves.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Clock Spread Spectrum support is not available.

  • Enabled—Clock Spread Spectrum support is always available.

IPV4 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV4HTTP

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

IIO eDPC Support drop-down list

set EdpEn

eDPC allows a downstream link to be disabled after an uncorrectable error, making recovery possible in a controlled and robust manner.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—eDPC support is disabled.

  • On Fatal Error—eDPC is enabled only for fatal errors.

  • On Fatal and Non-Fatal Errors—eDPC is enabled for both fatal and non-fatal errors.

Re-Size BAR Support drop-down list

set ResizeBarSupport

Re-Size BAR Support allows the system to dynamically adjust the size of the Base Address Registers (BAR) for PCIe devices to optimize memory allocation and performance. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

IPV6 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV6HTTP

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 21. BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • COM 0—Enables console redirection on serial port A during POST.

  • COM 1—Enables console redirection on serial port B during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

PCIe Slots CDN Control drop-down list

set PcieSlotsCdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

CDN Control drop-down list

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Some controllers such as Onboard storage controllers, Emulex FC adapters, and GPU controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

Default value: Enabled

Adaptive Memory Training

When this option is Enabled:

The Memory training will not happen in every boot but the BIOS will use the saved memory training result in every re-boot.

Some exceptions when memory training happens in every boot are:

BIOS update, CMOS reset, CPU or Memory configuration change, SPD or run-time uncorrectable error or the last boot has occurred more than 24 hours before.

When this option is Disabled, the Memory training happens in every boot.

Default value: Enabled.

Note

 

To disable the Fast Boot option, the end user must set the following tokens as mentioned below:

Adaptive Memory Training to Disabled

BIOS Techlog level to Normal

OptionROM Launch Optimization to Disabled.

BIOS Techlog Level

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 22. BIOS Parameters in Security Management Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Trusted Platform Module State drop-down list

set TPMControl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Security Device Support drop-down list

set TpmSupport

You should enable TPM support to enable security device support. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled if TPM is enabled.

SHA256 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA256PCRBank

PCR bank available for OS when BIOS is performing measurements.

  • Disabled—SHA256 PCR Bank is not available for BIOS.

  • Enabled—SHA256 PCR Bank is available for BIOS.

SHA-1 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA1PCRBank

PCR bank available for OS when BIOS is performing measurements.

  • Disabled—SHA-1 PCR Bank is not available for BIOS.

  • Enabled—SHA-1 PCR Bank is available for BIOS.

TPM Pending Operation drop-down list

set TPMPendingOperation

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Pending Operation option allows you to control the status of the pending operation. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No action.

  • TpmClear—Clears the pending operations.

SHA384 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA384PCRBank

The Platform Configuration Register (PCR) is a memory location in the TPM. Multiple PCRs are collectively referred to as a PCR bank. A Secure Hash Algorithm 384-bit or SHA-384PCR Bank allows to enable or disable TPM security.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

Intel Trusted Execution Technology Support drop-down list

set TXTSupport

Can be Enabled only when Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is Enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

TPM Minimal Physical Presence drop-down list

set TpmPpiRequired

This token allows you to apply recommended Microsoft default settings for TPM.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Total Memory Encryption (TME) drop-down list

set EnableTme

Allows you to provide the capability to encrypt the entirety of the physical memory of a system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Power on Password drop-down list

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SW Guard Extensions (SGX) drop-down list

set EnableSgx

Allows you to enable Software Guard Extensions (SGX) feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Multikey Total Memory Encryption (MK-TME) drop-down list

set EnableMktme

MK-TME allows you to have multiple encryption domains with one with own key. Different memory pages can be encrypted with different keys. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Pkg info In-Band Access drop-down list

set SgxPackageInfoInBandAccess

Allows you to enable SGX Package Info In-Band Access. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Factory Reset drop-down list

set SgxFactoryReset

Allows the system to perform SGX factory reset on subsequent boot. This deletes all registration data. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select Owner EPOCH input type drop-down list

set EpochUpdate

Allows you to change the seed for the security key used for the locked memory region that is created. This can be one of the following:

  • SGX Owner EPOCH activated—Does not change the current input type.

  • Change to New Random Owner EPOCHs—Changes EPOCH to a system generated random number.

  • Manual User Defined Owner EPOCHs—Changes the EPOCH seed to a hexadecimal value that you enter.

SGX QoS drop-down list

set SgxQoS

Allows you to enable SGX QoS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Auto MP Registration Agent drop-down list

set SgxAutoRegistrationAgent

Allows you to enable the registration authority service to store the platform keys. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Write Enable drop-down list

set SgxLeWr

Allows you to enable SGX Write feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SProcessor Epoch n field

set SgxEpoch0

Allows you to define the SGX EPOCH owner value for the EPOCH number designated by n.

SGX PUBKEY HASHn field

set SgxLePubKeyHashn

Allows you to set the Software Guard Extensions (SGX) value. This value can be set between:

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH0—Between 7-0

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH1—Between 15-8

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH2—Between 23-16

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH3—Between 31-24

DMA Control Opt-In Flag drop-down list

DMA Control Opt-In Flag - Enabling this token allows the operating system to enable Input Output Memory Management Unit (IOMMU) to prevent the DMA attacks from possible malicious devices.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

LIMIT CPU PA to 46 Bits drop-down list

set CpuPaLimit

Enable this option for Intel® VT-d enabling boot to boot with 2019 OS.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

TDX Secure Arbitration Mode (SEAM) Loader: drop-down list

set EnableTdxSeamldr

Enable this for a security feature that enables the initialization and management of Intel® Trusted Domain Extensions (TDX) for secure virtualized environments.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Trust Domain Extension (TDX) drop-down list

set EnableTdx

Allows you to enhance the security of virtualized environments by creating isolated execution environments, known as Trust Domains, that protect sensitive data and code from other software, including the hypervisor.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 23. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Select Memory RAS configuration drop-down list

set SelectMemoryRAS

Determines how the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Maximum Performance—System performance is optimized.

  • ADDDC Sparing—Adaptive virtual lockstep is an algorithm implemented in the hardware and firmware to support the ADDDC mode. When selected, the system performance is optimized till the algorithm is activated. The algorithm is activated in case of DRAM device failure. Once the algorithm is activated, the virtual lockstep regions are activated to map out the failed region during run-time dynamically, and the performance impact is restricted at a region level.

  • Mirror Mode 1LM—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

  • Partial Mirror Mode 1LM—Partial DIMM Mirroring creates a mirrored copy of a specific region of memory cells, rather than keeping the complete mirror copy. Partial Mirroring creates a mirrored region in memory map with the attributes of a partial mirror copy. Up to 50% of the total memory capacity can be mirrored, using up to 4 partial mirrors.

NUMA drop-down list

set NUMAOptimize

Whether the BIOS supports Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Partial Cache Line Sparing drop-down list

set PartialCacheLineSparing

Partial cache line sparing (PCLS) is an error-prevention mechanism in memory controllers. PCLS statically encodes the locations of the faulty nibbles of bits into a sparing directory along with the corresponding data content for replacement during memory accesses. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select PPR Type drop-down list

set SelectPprType

Cisco IMC supports Hard-PPR, which permanently remaps accesses from a designated faulty row to a designated spare row.

This can be one of the following:

  • Hard PPR—Support is enabled.

    Note

     

    Hard PPR can be used only when Memory RAS Configuration is set to ADDDC Sparing. For other RAS selections, this setting should be set to Disabled.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

BME DMA Mitigation drop-down list

set BmeDmaMitigation

Allows you to disable the PCI BME bit to mitigate the threat from an unauthorized external DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCI BME bit is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCI BME bit is enabled in the BIOS.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Partial Memory Mirror Mode drop-down list

set PartialMirrorModeConfig

The partial memory size is either in percentage or in GB. This can be one of the following:

  • Percentage—The partial memory mirror is defined in percentage.

  • Value in GB—The partial memory mirror is defined in GB.

  • Disabled—Partial memory mirror is disabled.

DCPMM Firmware Downgrade drop-down list

set DCPMMFirmwareDowngrade

Whether the BIOS supports downgrading the DCPMM firmware. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Partial Mirrorn Size in GB field

set PartialMirrorValue1

Size of the first partial nth memory mirror in GB.

n = 1, 2, or 3

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

Note

 

The combined memory size of all the partial mirror should not exceed 50% of the physical memory size.

Partial Mirror percentage field

set PartialMirrorPercent

Percentage of memory to mirror above 4GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 50.

Memory Size Limit in GB field

set MemorySizeLimit

Use this option to reduce the size of the physical memory limit in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

NVM Performance Setting drop-down list

set NvmdimmPerformConfig

Enables you to configure NVM baseline performance settings depending on the workload behavior.

  • BW Optimized

  • Latency Optimized

  • Balanced Profile

CR QoS drop-down list

set CRQoS

Enables you to select the CR QoS tuning.

This can be one of the following:

  • Mode 1

  • Mode 2

  • Mode 0CR QoS feature is disabled.

Snoopy mode for AD drop-down list

set SnoopyModeForAD

Enables new AD specific feature to avoid directory updates to DDRT memory from non-NUMA optimized workloads.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

CR FastGo Config drop-down list

set CrfastgoConfig

Enables you to select CR QoS configuration profiles.

This can be one of the following:

  • Enable Optimization

  • Disable Optimization

  • Auto

Memory Refresh Rate drop-down list

set MemoryRefreshRate

Enables you to increase or decrease memory refresh rate. Increasing the DRAM refresh rate reduces the maximum number of activates (hammers) that can occur before the next refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1X Refresh—Refresh rate is at minimum.

  • 2X Refresh —Refresh is 2X faster.

Snoopy mode for 2LM drop-down list

set SnoopyModeFor2LM

Enables you to avoid directory updates to far-memory from non-NUMA optimized workloads.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Thermal Throttling Mode drop-down list

set MemoryThermalThrottling

This function is used for adjusting memory temperature. If memory temperature is excessively high after the function is enabled, the memory access rate is reduced and Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) adjusts the fan to cool down the memory to avoid any DIMM damage.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • CLTT with PECI—Enables Closed Loop Thermal Throttling with Platform Environment Control Interface.

Panic and High Watermark drop-down list

set PanicHighWatermark

When set to low, the memory controller does not postpone refreshes while Memory Refresh Rate is set to 1X Refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • Low—Refresh rate is set to low.

  • High —Refresh rate is set to high.

UMA drop-down list

set UmaBasedClustering

Allows you to set UMA settings. This can be one of the following:

  • Disable(All2All)

  • Hemisphere(2-clusters)

Enhanced Memory Test drop-down list

set AdvancedMemTest

Note

 

This feature is applicable only to Samsung, Hynix and Micron DIMMs.

You can enable advance DIMM testing during BIOS POST using this feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

  • Auto—Automatically determines whether to perform the Enhanced Memory Test based on system conditions and requirements.

eADR Support drop-down list

set EadrSupport

Extended asynchronous DRAM refresh (eADR) support helps avoid the waiting period of cache-flushing commands to move data stored in the CPU cache to persistent memory. This improves performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled

  • Auto

Volatile Memory Mode drop-down list

set VolMemoryMode

Volatile Memory Mode setting is displayed when the BIOS supports Intel® Optane PMem. This can be one of the following:

  • 1LM—This option can be used to set Intel® Optane PMem in App-Direct Mode.

  • 2LM—This options allows 2LM to facilitate the DDR4 memory operating as cache.

Adaptive Refresh Management Level drop-down list

set AdaptiveRefreshMgmtLevel

Refresh management settings are read-only. Adaptive RFM allows the controller flexibility to choose additional RFM threshold settings called RFM levels. The RFM levels permit alignment of the controller-issued RFM commands with the in-DRAM management of these commands.

This can be one of the following:

  • Default

  • Level A

  • Level B

  • Level C

Memory Bandwidth Boost drop-down list

set MemoryBandwidthBoost

Intel® Memory Bandwidth Boost is a feature of the Intel® Optane™ persistent memory that provides a dynamic range of power and bandwidth when thermal headroom is available. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Error Check Scrub drop-down list

set ErrorCheckScrub

You can enable memory check with or without result collection. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled without Result Collection

  • Enabled with Result Collection

Rank Margin Tool drop-down list

set EnableRMT

Indicates whether the rank margin tool is used and whether a margin test (which tests the memory sequence and voltage signals) is performed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled

MMIO High Base drop-down list

set MmiohBase

MMIO High Base configures the base address for the high memory-mapped I/O (MMIO) region, which is used to map device memory and I/O resources above the 4GB address space, optimizing system memory allocation and performance.

This can be one of the following:

  • 512G—Sets the MMIO High Base to 512 gigabytes.

  • 1T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 1 terabyte.

  • 2T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 2 terabytes.

  • 4T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 4 terabytes.

  • 16T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 16 terabytes.

  • 24T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 24 terabytes.

  • 32T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 32 terabytes.

  • 40T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 40 terabytes.

  • 56T—Sets the MMIO High Base to 56 terabytes.

MMIO High Granularity Size drop-down list

set MmiohSize

MMIO High Granularity Size configures the granularity of the high memory-mapped I/O (MMIO) region, determining the size increments for allocating MMIO space above the 4GB address range, which helps optimize memory allocation and system performance.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 1 gigabyte.

  • 4G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 4 gigabytes.

  • 16G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 16 gigabytes.

  • 64G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 64 gigabytes.

  • 256G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 256 gigabytes.

  • 1024G—Sets the MMIO High Granularity Size to 1024 gigabytes.

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 24. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher drop-down list

set AdjacentCacheLinePrefetch

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even or odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

  • Enabled—The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

Hardware Prefetcher drop-down list

set HardwarePrefetch

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

DCU IP Prefetcher drop-down list

set DcuIpPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

DCU Streamer Prefetch drop-down list

set DcuStreamerPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

  • Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

Virtual Numa drop-down list

set VirtualNuma

Virtual NUMA (virtual non-uniform memory access) is a memory-access optimization method for VMware virtual machines (VMs), which helps prevent memory-bandwidth bottlenecks.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Functionality is disabled.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

CPU Performance drop-down list

set CPUPerformance

Sets the CPU performance profile for the options listed above. This can be one of the following:

  • Enterprise—All options are enabled.

  • HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

  • Hight Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

  • Custom—All performance profile options can be configured from the BIOS setup on the server. In addition, the Hardware Prefetcher and Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch options can be configured as well.

LLC Dead Line drop-down list

set LLCALLoc

In CPU non-inclusive cache scheme, MLC evictions are filled into the LLC. When lines are evicted from the MLC, the core can flag them as dead (not likely to be read again). The LLC has the option to drop dead lines and not fill them in the LLC.

If this feature is disabled, dead lines are always dropped and are never filled into the LLC.

If this feature is enabled, the LLC can fill dead lines into the LLC if there is free space available.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

  • Auto—CPU determines the LLC dead line allocation.

XPT Remote Prefetch drop-down list

set XPTRemotePrefetch

This feature allows an LLC request to be duplicated and sent to an appropriate memory controller in a remote machine based on the recent LLC history to reduce latency.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

  • Auto—CPU determines the functionality.

UPI Link Enablement drop-down list

set UPILinkEnablement

Enables the minimum number of UPI links required by the processor.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1

  • 2

  • Auto

Enhanced CPU Performance drop-down list

set EnhancedCPUPerformance

Note

 
Once you enable this functionality, you cannot enable Enable Power Characterization and Power Capping.

Enhances CPU performance by adjusting server settings automatically.

Note

 

Enabling this functionality may increase power consumption.

The server should meet the following requirements in order to use this functionality:

  • Server should not contain Barlow Pass DIMMs

  • DIMM module size present in the Cisco UCS C220 M6 server should be less than 64GB and in Cisco UCS C240 M6 server should be less than 256GB

  • No GPU cards are present in the server.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Allows Cisco IMC to adjust server settings to increase performance.

C1 Auto Demotion drop-down list

set C1AutoDemotion

If enabled, CPU automatically demotes to C1 based on un-core auto-demote information.

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

UPI Power Management drop-down list

set UPIPowerManagement

UPI power management is used to conserve power on the server.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Functionality is enabled.

Optimized Power Mode drop-down list

set OptimizedPowerMode

Optimized Power Mode is used to save power while having minimal impact on performance for certain workloads that run at 30-40% CPU utilization.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Functionality is enabled.

C1 Auto UnDemotion drop-down list

set C1AutoUnDemotion

Select whether to enable processors to automatically undemote from C1.

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 25. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Extended APIC drop-down list

set LocalX2Apic

Allows you to enable or disable extended APIC support. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Enables APIC support.

  • Disabled—Disables APIC support.

Intel Virtualization Technology drop-down list

set IntelVT

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Processor C6 Report drop-down list

set ProcessorC6Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C6 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C6 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

  • Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

Processor C1E drop-down list

set ProcessorC1E

Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

  • Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

EIST PSD Function drop-down list

set ExecuteDisable

EIST reduces the latency inherent with changing the voltage-frequency pair (P-state), thus allowing those transitions to occur more frequently. This allows for more granular, demand-based switching and can optimize the power-to-performance balance, based on the demands of the applications. This can be one of the following:

  • HW ALL— The processor is coordinates the P-state among logical processors dependencies. The OS keeps the P-state request up to date on all logical processors.

  • SW ALL—The OS Power Manager coordinates the P-state among logical processors with dependencies and initiates the transition on all of those Logical Processors.

Turbo Mode drop-down list

set IntelTurboBoostTech

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost Technology if required.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Uncore Frequency Scaling drop-down list

set UFSDisable

This feature allows you configure the scaling of uncore frequency of the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • enabled—Uncore frequency of the processor scales up or down based on the load.

  • disabled—Uncore frequency of the processor remains fixed.

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the fixed higher and lower values for Uncore Frequency Scaling.

Boot Performance Mode drop-down list

set BootPerformanceMode

Allows you to select the BIOS performance state that is set before the operating system handoff. This can be one of the following:

  • Max Performance—Processor P-state ratio is maximum

  • Max Efficient—Processor P-state ratio is minimum

  • Set by Intel NM—Value is set automatically.

Configurable TDP Level drop-down list

set ConfigTDPLevel

Configurable TDP Level feature allows adjustments in processor thermal design power values. By modifying the processor behavior and the performance levels, power consumption of a processor can be configured and TDP can be adjusted as the same time. Hence, a processor operates at higher or lower performance levels, depending on the available cooling capacities and desired power consumption. This can be one of the following:

  • Normal

  • Level 1

  • Level 2

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the values for TDP level.

SpeedStep (Pstates) drop-down list

set EnhancedIntelSpeedStep

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor CMCI drop-down list

set ProcessorCMCI

Allows the CPU to trigger interrupts on corrected machine check events. The corrected machine check interrupt (CMCI) allows faster reaction than the traditional polling timer. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables CMCI.

  • Enabled—Enables CMCI. This is the default value.

HyperThreading [ALL] drop-down list

set IntelHyperThread

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

  • Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

Workload Configuration drop-down list

set WorkLdConfig

This feature allows for workload optimization. The options are Balanced and I/O Sensitive:

  • Balanced

  • IO Sensitive

Cores Enabled drop-down list

set CoreMultiProcessing

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

  • 1 through 48—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

UPI Link Frequency Select drop-down list

set QpiLinkSpeed

Note

 

UPI Link Frequency Select token is not applicable for single socket configuration.

This feature allows you to configure the Intel Ultra Path Interconnect (UPI) link speed between multiple sockets. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—This option configures the optimal link speed automatically.

  • 9.6 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 9.6GT/s.

  • 10.4 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 10.4GT/s

UPI Prefetch drop-down list

set KTIPrefetch

UPI prefetch is a mechanism to get the memory read started early on a DDR bus. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The UPI prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

  • Auto —CPU determines the UPI Prefetch mode.

Sub NUMA Clustering drop-down list

set SNC

Whether the CPU supports sub NUMA clustering, in which the tag directory and the memory channel are always in the same region. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled— Sub NUMA clustering does not occur.

  • SNC2—The processor is divided into two NUMA nodes, each with its own memory access paths. This can improve memory access times for workloads that benefit from lower memory latency and higher memory bandwidth.

  • SNC4—The processor is divided into four NUMA nodes. This can enhance memory access performance for workloads that benefit from extremely low memory latency and high memory bandwidth.

  • auto — The BIOS determines what Sub NUMA clustering is done.

Power Performance Tuning drop-down list

set PwrPerfTuning

Determines if the BIOS or Operating System can turn on the energy performance bias tuning. The options are BIOS and OS.

  • BIOS—Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

  • OS—Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

  • PECI—Chooses Platform Environmental Control Interface for energy performance tuning.

XPT Prefetch drop-down list

set XPTPrefetch

Whether XPT prefetch is used to enable a read request sent to the last level cache to issue a copy of that request to the memory controller prefetcher. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The CPU does not use the XPT Prefetch option.

  • enabled—The CPU enables the XPT prefetch option.

Package C State

set PackageCstateLimit

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

  • no-limit—The server may enter any available C state.

  • auto —The CPU determines the physical elevation.

  • —The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C1 option. This requires less power than C1 or C0, but it takes the server slightly longer to return to high performance mode.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

Energy Performance Bias Config drop-down list

set CpuEngPerfBias

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • — The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with maximum power to keep reduce power consumption.

Hardware P-States drop-down list

set CpuHWPM

Enables processor Hardware P-State. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—HWPM is disabled.

  • hwpm-native-mode—HWPM native mode is enabled.

  • hwpm-oob-mode—HWPM Out-Of-Box mode is enabled.

  • Native Mode with no Legacy (only GUI)

LLC Prefetch drop-down list

set LLCPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the LLC Prefetch mechanism to fetch the date into the LLC. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The LLC prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Autonomous Core C-state drop-down list

set AutoCCState

Enables CPU Autonomous C-State, which converts the HALT instructions to the MWAIT instructions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is disabled.

  • Enabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is enabled.

Energy Efficient Turbo drop-down list

set EnergyEfficientTurbo

When energy efficient turbo is enabled, the optimal turbo frequency of the CPU turns dynamic based on CPU utilization. The power/performance bias setting also influences energy efficient turbo. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is disabled.

  • Enabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is enabled.

Patrol Scrub drop-down list

set PatrolScrub

Allows the system to actively search for, and correct, single bit memory errors even in unused portions of the memory on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The system checks for memory ECC errors only when the CPU reads or writes a memory address.

  • Enabled—The system periodically reads and writes memory searching for ECC errors. If any errors are found, the system attempts to fix them. This option may correct single bit errors before they become multi-bit errors, but it may adversely affect performance when the patrol scrub is running.

  • Enable at End of POST—The system checks for memory ECC errors after BIOS POST.

Processor EPP Profile drop-down list

set EPPProfile

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • Performance

  • Balanced Performance

  • Balanced Power

  • Power

Intel Dynamic Speed Select drop-down list

set IntelDynamicSpeedSelect

Intel Dynamic Speed Select modes allow you to run the CPU with different speed and cores in auto mode. This can be one of the following:

  • DisabledIntel Dynamic Speed Select is disabled.

  • EnabledIntel Dynamic Speed Select is enabled.

Intel Speed Select drop-down list

set IntelSpeedSelect

Intel Speed Select modes allows you to run the CPU with different speed and cores.

This can be one of the following:

  • Base— It will allow users to access maximum core and Thermal Design Power (TDP) ratio.

  • Config 3— It will allow users to access core and TDP ratio lesser than Base.

  • Config 4— It will allow users to access core and TDP ratio lesser than Config 3.

Default value: Base.

X2APIC Opt-Out Flag drop-down list

set X2ApicOptOut

Allows the system to disable the extended x2APIC mode, reverting to the legacy APIC mode for interrupt management. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the feature.

  • Enabled—Enables the feature.

IOAT Configuration drop-down list

set IOATConfigCpm

IOAT Configuration enables or disables Intel I/O Acceleration Technology (IOAT), which improves data transfer efficiency and reduces CPU overhead by offloading memory copy operations. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the feature.

  • Enabled—Enables the feature.

PRMRR Size drop-down list

set PrmrrSize

PRMRR Size configures the size of the Protected Range Memory Region Register (PRMRR), which is used to define protected memory regions for enhanced security and isolation in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • 128MB—Defines a 128 megabyte protected memory region.

  • 256MB—Defines a 256 megabyte protected memory region.

  • 512MB—Defines a 512 megabyte protected memory region.

  • 1GB—Defines a 1 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 2GB—Defines a 2 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 4GB—Defines a 4 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 8GB—Defines an 8 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 16GB—Defines a 16 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 32GB—Defines a 32 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 64GB—Defines a 64 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 128GB—Defines a 128 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 256GB—Defines a 256 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • 512GB—Defines a 512 gigabyte protected memory region.

  • Invalid Config.—Indicates an invalid configuration for the protected memory region.

  • Auto—Automatically configures the protected memory region size based on system requirements.

C220 M6 and C240 M6 Servers

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 26. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

MLOM OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN4—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Front NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenLinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

Rear NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotRearNvmenOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the rear SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Rear NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotRearNvmenLinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe rear slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

Legacy USB Support drop-down list

set UsbLegacySupport

Whether the system supports legacy USB devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—USB devices are only available to EFI applications.

  • Enabled—Legacy USB support is always available.

  • Auto—Feature is is automatically assigned.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

Intel VTD Coherency Support drop-down list

set CoherencySupport

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Coherency. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support coherency.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Coherency as required.

Intel VT for Directed IO drop-down list

set IntelVTD

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Note

 

If you change this option, you must power cycle the server before the setting takes effect.

VMD Enable drop-down list

set VMDenable

Intel Volume Management Device (VMD) is for PCIe NVMe SSDs that provides hardware logic to manage and aggregate NVMe SSDs.

This can be one the following:

  • Enabled— Enables benefits like robust surprise hot-plug, status LED management.

  • Disabled— Disables benefits like robust surprise hot-plug, status LED management.

Default value: Disabled.

Refer Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU User Guide and Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU (Intel® VROC) to configure VMD.

Details of VMD supported and unsupported ports for Cisco UCS C480 M5 servers:

Cisco UCS C480 NVMe SKU (32 drive NVME System)

  • DMI connected ports 7, 8, and 23 do not support VMD.

  • All other twenty nine ports support VMD.

Cisco UCS C480 Non-NVMe SKU

  • DMI connected ports 1, 2, and 18 do not support VMD.

  • Ports 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 16, 17, 23, 24 support VMD.

Intel VTD ATS support drop-down list

set ATS

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Address Translation Services (ATS). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support ATS.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d ATS as required.

LOM Port n OptionROM drop-down list

set LomOpromControlPort0

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available on LOM port 1.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available on LOM port 1.

PCIe RAS Support drop-down list

set PCIeRASSupport

Whether PCIe RAS Support is available on the PCIe slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe RAS is not available on the slot.

  • Enabled—PCIe RAS is available on port.

All Onboard LOM Ports drop-down list

set AllLomPortControl

Whether Option ROM is available on all LOM ports. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is disabled on all the ports.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is enabled on all the ports.

USB Port Rear drop-down list

set UsbPortRear

Whether the rear panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

VGA Priority drop-down list

set VgaPriority

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • OnBoard—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

  • OffBoard—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

  • OnBoardDisabled—Priority is given to the PCIe Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled. The vKVM does not function when the onboard VGA is disabled.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

USB Port Internal drop-down list

set UsbPortInt

Whether the internal USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

PCIe PLL SSC drop-down list

set PciePllSsc

Enable this feature to reduce EMI interference by down spreading clock 0.5%. Disable this feature to centralize the clock without spreading.

This can be one of the following:

  • auto—EMI interference is auto adjusted.

    Disabled—EMI interference is auto adjusted.

  • ZeroPointFive—EMI interference is reduced by down spreading the clock 0.5%.

Network Stack drop-down list

set NetworkStack

This option allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

IPV4 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

External SSC enable drop-down list

set EnableClockSpreadSpec

This option allows you to reduce the EMI of your motherboard by modulating the signals it generates so that the spikes are reduced to flatter curves.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Clock Spread Spectrum support is not available.

  • Enabled—Clock Spread Spectrum support is always available.

IPV4 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV4HTTP

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

IIO eDPC Support drop-down list

set EdpEn

eDPC allows a downstream link to be disabled after an uncorrectable error, making recovery possible in a controlled and robust manner.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—eDPC support is disabled.

  • On Fatal Error—eDPC is enabled only for fatal errors.

  • On Fatal and Non-Fatal Errors—eDPC is enabled for both fatal and non-fatal errors.

IPV6 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV6HTTP

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 27. BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • COM 0—Enables console redirection on serial port A during POST.

  • COM 1—Enables console redirection on serial port B during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

PCIe Slots CDN Control drop-down list

set PcieSlotsCdnEnable

Note

 

This option is available only on Cisco UCS C240 M6 servers equipped with Mellanox cards in slots 2 or 5.

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

CDN Control drop-down list

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Some controllers such as Onboard storage controllers, Emulex FC adapters, and GPU controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

Default value: Enabled

Adaptive Memory Training

When this option is Enabled:

The Memory training will not happen in every boot but the BIOS will use the saved memory training result in every re-boot.

Some exceptions when memory training happens in every boot are:

BIOS update, CMOS reset, CPU or Memory configuration change, SPD or run-time uncorrectable error or the last boot has occurred more than 24 hours before.

When this option is Disabled, the Memory training happens in every boot.

Default value: Enabled.

Note

 

To disable the Fast Boot option, the end user must set the following tokens as mentioned below:

Adaptive Memory Training to Disabled

BIOS Techlog level to Normal

OptionROM Launch Optimization to Disabled.

BIOS Techlog Level

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 28. BIOS Parameters in Security Management Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

SHA-1 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA1PCRBank

PCR bank available for OS when BIOS is performing measurements.

  • Disabled—SHA-1 PCR Bank is not available for BIOS.

  • Enabled—SHA-1 PCR Bank is available for BIOS.

Trusted Platform Module State drop-down list

set TPMControl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

DMA Control Opt-In Flag drop-down list

DMA Control Opt-In Flag - Enabling this token allows the operating system to enable Input Output Memory Management Unit (IOMMU) to prevent the DMA attacks from possible malicious devices.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

TPM Pending Operation drop-down list

set TPMPendingOperation

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Pending Operation option allows you to control the status of the pending operation. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No action.

  • TpmClear—Clears the pending operations.

SHA256 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA256PCRBank

PCR bank available for OS when BIOS is performing measurements.

  • Disabled—SHA256 PCR Bank is not available for BIOS.

  • Enabled—SHA256 PCR Bank is available for BIOS.

SHA384 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA384PCRBank

The Platform Configuration Register (PCR) is a memory location in the TPM. Multiple PCRs are collectively referred to as a PCR bank. A Secure Hash Algorithm 384-bit or SHA-384PCR Bank allows to enable or disable TPM security.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

Power on Password drop-down list

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

TPM Minimal Physical Presence drop-down list

This token allows you to apply recommended Microsoft default settings for TPM.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Intel Trusted Execution Technology Support drop-down list

set TXTSupport

Can be Enabled only when Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is Enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Multikey Total Memory Encryption (MK-TME) drop-down list

set EnableMktme

MK-TME allows you to have multiple encryption domains with one with own key. Different memory pages can be encrypted with different keys. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Total Memory Encryption (TME) drop-down list

set EnableTme

Allows you to provide the capability to encrypt the entirety of the physical memory of a system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Factory Reset drop-down list

set SgxFactoryReset

Allows the system to perform SGX factory reset on subsequent boot. This deletes all registration data. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SW Guard Extensions (SGX) drop-down list

set EnableSgx

Allows you to enable Software Guard Extensions (SGX) feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX QoS drop-down list

set SgxQoS

Allows you to enable SGX QoS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Pkg info In-Band Access drop-down list

set SgxPackageInfoInBandAccess

Allows you to enable SGX Package Info In-Band Access. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX Write Enable drop-down list

set SgxLeWr

Allows you to enable SGX Write feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select Owner EPOCH input type drop-down list

set EpochUpdate

Allows you to change the seed for the security key used for the locked memory region that is created. This can be one of the following:

  • SGX Owner EPOCH activated—Does not change the current input type.

  • Change to New Random Owner EPOCHs—Changes EPOCH to a system generated random number.

  • Manual User Defined Owner EPOCHs—Changes the EPOCH seed to a hexadecimal value that you enter.

SProcessor Epoch n field

set SgxEpoch0

Allows you to define the SGX EPOCH owner value for the EPOCH number designated by n.

SGX Auto MP Registration Agent drop-down list

set SgxAutoRegistrationAgent

Allows you to enable the registration authority service to store the platform keys. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SGX PUBKEY HASHn field

set SgxLePubKeyHashn

Allows you to set the Software Guard Extensions (SGX) value. This value can be set between:

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH0—Between 7-0

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH1—Between 15-8

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH2—Between 23-16

  • SGX PUBKEY HASH3—Between 31-24

LIMIT CPU PA to 46 Bits drop-down list

set CpuPaLimit

Enable this option for Intel® VT-d enabling boot to boot with 2019 OS.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 29. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Select Memory RAS configuration drop-down list

set SelectMemoryRAS

Determines how the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Maximum Performance—System performance is optimized.

  • ADDDC Sparing—Adaptive virtual lockstep is an algorithm implemented in the hardware and firmware to support the ADDDC mode. When selected, the system performance is optimized till the algorithm is activated. The algorithm is activated in case of DRAM device failure. Once the algorithm is activated, the virtual lockstep regions are activated to map out the failed region during run-time dynamically, and the performance impact is restricted at a region level.

  • Mirror Mode 1LM—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

  • Partial Mirror Mode 1LM—Partial DIMM Mirroring creates a mirrored copy of a specific region of memory cells, rather than keeping the complete mirror copy. Partial Mirroring creates a mirrored region in memory map with the attributes of a partial mirror copy. Up to 50% of the total memory capacity can be mirrored, using up to 4 partial mirrors.

NUMA drop-down list

set NUMAOptimize

Whether the BIOS supports Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Partial Cache Line Sparing drop-down list

set PartialCacheLineSparing

Partial cache line sparing (PCLS) is an error-prevention mechanism in memory controllers. PCLS statically encodes the locations of the faulty nibbles of bits into a sparing directory along with the corresponding data content for replacement during memory accesses. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select PPR Type drop-down list

set SelectPprType

Cisco IMC supports Hard-PPR, which permanently remaps accesses from a designated faulty row to a designated spare row.

This can be one of the following:

  • Hard PPR—Support is enabled.

    Note

     

    Hard PPR can be used only when Memory RAS Configuration is set to ADDDC Sparing. For other RAS selections, this setting should be set to Disabled.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

BME DMA Mitigation drop-down list

set BmeDmaMitigation

Allows you to disable the PCI BME bit to mitigate the threat from an unauthorized external DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCI BME bit is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCI BME bit is enabled in the BIOS.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Partial Memory Mirror Mode drop-down list

set PartialMirrorModeConfig

The partial memory size is either in percentage or in GB. This can be one of the following:

  • Percentage—The partial memory mirror is defined in percentage.

  • Value in GB—The partial memory mirror is defined in GB.

  • Disabled—Partial memory mirror is disabled.

DCPMM Firmware Downgrade drop-down list

set DCPMMFirmwareDowngrade

Whether the BIOS supports downgrading the DCPMM firmware. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Partial Mirrorn Size in GB field

set PartialMirrorValue1

Size of the first partial nth memory mirror in GB.

n = 1, 2, or 3

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

Note

 

The combined memory size of all the partial mirror should not exceed 50% of the physical memory size.

Partial Mirror percentage field

set PartialMirrorPercent

Percentage of memory to mirror above 4GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 50.

Memory Size Limit in GB field

set MemorySizeLimit

Use this option to reduce the size of the physical memory limit in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

NVM Performance Setting drop-down list

set NvmdimmPerformConfig

Enables you to configure NVM baseline performance settings depending on the workload behavior.

  • BW Optimized

  • Latency Optimized

  • Balanced Profile

CR QoS drop-down list

set CRQoS

Enables you to select the CR QoS tuning.

This can be one of the following:

  • Mode 1

  • Mode 2

  • Mode 0CR QoS feature is disabled.

Snoopy mode for AD drop-down list

set SnoopyModeForAD

Enables new AD specific feature to avoid directory updates to DDRT memory from non-NUMA optimized workloads.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

CR FastGo Config drop-down list

set CrfastgoConfig

Enables you to select CR QoS configuration profiles.

This can be one of the following:

  • Enable Optimization

  • Disable Optimization

  • Auto

Memory Refresh Rate drop-down list

set MemoryRefreshRate

Enables you to increase or decrease memory refresh rate. Increasing the DRAM refresh rate reduces the maximum number of activates (hammers) that can occur before the next refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1X Refresh—Refresh rate is at minimum.

  • 2X Refresh —Refresh is 2X faster.

Snoopy mode for 2LM drop-down list

set SnoopyModeFor2LM

Enables you to avoid directory updates to far-memory from non-NUMA optimized workloads.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Thermal Throttling Mode drop-down list

set MemoryThermalThrottling

This function is used for adjusting memory temperature. If memory temperature is excessively high after the function is enabled, the memory access rate is reduced and Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) adjusts the fan to cool down the memory to avoid any DIMM damage.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • CLTT with PECI—Enables Closed Loop Thermal Throttling with Platform Environment Control Interface.

Panic and High Watermark drop-down list

set PanicHighWatermark

When set to low, the memory controller does not postpone refreshes while Memory Refresh Rate is set to 1X Refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • Low—Refresh rate is set to low.

  • High —Refresh rate is set to high.

UMA drop-down list

set UmaBasedClustering

Allows you to set UMA settings. This can be one of the following:

  • Disable(All2All)

  • Hemisphere(2-clusters)

Advanced Memory Test drop-down list

set AdvancedMemTest

Note

 

This feature is applicable only to Samsung, Hynix and Micron DIMMs.

You can enable advance DIMM testing during BIOS POST using this feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

eADR Support drop-down list

set EadrSupport

Extended asynchronous DRAM refresh (eADR) support helps avoid the waiting period of cache-flushing commands to move data stored in the CPU cache to persistent memory. This improves performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled

  • Enabled

  • Auto

Volatile Memory Mode drop-down list

set VolMemoryMode

Volatile Memory Mode setting is displayed when the BIOS supports Intel® Optane PMem. This can be one of the following:

  • 1LM—This option can be used to set Intel® Optane PMem in App-Direct Mode.

  • 2LM—This options allows 2LM to facilitate the DDR4 memory operating as cache.

Memory Bandwidth Boost drop-down list

set MemoryBandwidthBoost

Intel® Memory Bandwidth Boost is a feature of the Intel® Optane™ persistent memory that provides a dynamic range of power and bandwidth when thermal headroom is available. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 30. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher drop-down list

set AdjacentCacheLinePrefetch

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even or odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

  • Enabled—The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

Hardware Prefetcher drop-down list

set HardwarePrefetch

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

DCU IP Prefetcher drop-down list

set DcuIpPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

DCU Streamer Prefetch drop-down list

set DcuStreamerPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

  • Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

Virtual Numa drop-down list

set VirtualNuma

Virtual NUMA (virtual non-uniform memory access) is a memory-access optimization method for VMware virtual machines (VMs), which helps prevent memory-bandwidth bottlenecks.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Functionality is disabled.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

CPU Performance drop-down list

set CPUPerformance

Sets the CPU performance profile for the options listed above. This can be one of the following:

  • Enterprise—All options are enabled.

  • HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

  • Hight Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

  • Custom—All performance profile options can be configured from the BIOS setup on the server. In addition, the Hardware Prefetcher and Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch options can be configured as well.

LLC Dead Line drop-down list

set LLCALLoc

In CPU non-inclusive cache scheme, MLC evictions are filled into the LLC. When lines are evicted from the MLC, the core can flag them as dead (not likely to be read again). The LLC has the option to drop dead lines and not fill them in the LLC.

If this feature is disabled, dead lines are always dropped and are never filled into the LLC.

If this feature is enabled, the LLC can fill dead lines into the LLC if there is free space available.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

  • Auto—CPU determines the LLC dead line allocation.

XPT Remote Prefetch drop-down list

set XPTRemotePrefetch

This feature allows an LLC request to be duplicated and sent to an appropriate memory controller in a remote machine based on the recent LLC history to reduce latency.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

  • Auto—CPU determines the functionality.

UPI Link Enablement drop-down list

set UPILinkEnablement

Enables the minimum number of UPI links required by the processor.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1

  • 2

  • Auto

Enhanced CPU Performance drop-down list

set EnhancedCPUPerformance

Note

 
Once you enable this functionality, you cannot enable Enable Power Characterization and Power Capping.

Enhances CPU performance by adjusting server settings automatically.

Note

 

Enabling this functionality may increase power consumption.

The server should meet the following requirements in order to use this functionality:

  • Server should not contain Barlow Pass DIMMs

  • DIMM module size present in the Cisco UCS C220 M6 server should be less than 64GB and in Cisco UCS C240 M6 server should be less than 256GB

  • No GPU cards are present in the server.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Allows Cisco IMC to adjust server settings to increase performance.

C1 Auto Demotion drop-down list

set C1AutoDemotion

If enabled, CPU automatically demotes to C1 based on un-core auto-demote information.

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

UPI Power Management drop-down list

set UPIPowerManagement

UPI power management is used to conserve power on the server.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Auto—Functionality is enabled.

C1 Auto UnDemotion drop-down list

set C1AutoUnDemotion

Select whether to enable processors to automatically undemote from C1.

  • Disabled—The processor does not run with this functionality.

  • Enabled—Functionality is enabled.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 31. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Extended APIC drop-down list

set LocalX2Apic

Allows you to enable or disable extended APIC support. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Enables APIC support.

  • Disabled—Disables APIC support.

Intel Virtualization Technology drop-down list

set IntelVT

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Processor C6 Report drop-down list

set ProcessorC6Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C6 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C6 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

  • Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

Processor C1E drop-down list

set ProcessorC1E

Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

  • Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

EIST PSD Function drop-down list

set ExecuteDisable

EIST reduces the latency inherent with changing the voltage-frequency pair (P-state), thus allowing those transitions to occur more frequently. This allows for more granular, demand-based switching and can optimize the power-to-performance balance, based on the demands of the applications. This can be one of the following:

  • HW ALL— The processor is coordinates the P-state among logical processors dependencies. The OS keeps the P-state request up to date on all logical processors.

  • SW ALL—The OS Power Manager coordinates the P-state among logical processors with dependencies and initiates the transition on all of those Logical Processors.

Turbo Mode drop-down list

set IntelTurboBoostTech

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost Technology if required.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Uncore Frequency Scaling drop-down list

set UFSDisable

This feature allows you configure the scaling of uncore frequency of the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • enabled—Uncore frequency of the processor scales up or down based on the load.

  • disabled—Uncore frequency of the processor remains fixed.

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the fixed higher and lower values for Uncore Frequency Scaling.

Boot Performance Mode drop-down list

set BootPerformanceMode

Allows you to select the BIOS performance state that is set before the operating system handoff. This can be one of the following:

  • Max Performance—Processor P-state ratio is maximum

  • Max Efficient—Processor P-state ratio is minimum

  • Set by Intel NM—Value is set automatically.

Configurable TDP Level drop-down list

set ConfigTDPLevel

Configurable TDP Level feature allows adjustments in processor thermal design power values. By modifying the processor behavior and the performance levels, power consumption of a processor can be configured and TDP can be adjusted as the same time. Hence, a processor operates at higher or lower performance levels, depending on the available cooling capacities and desired power consumption. This can be one of the following:

  • Normal

  • Level 1

  • Level 2

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the values for TDP level.

SpeedStep (Pstates) drop-down list

set EnhancedIntelSpeedStep

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor CMCI drop-down list

set ProcessorCMCI

Allows the CPU to trigger interrupts on corrected machine check events. The corrected machine check interrupt (CMCI) allows faster reaction than the traditional polling timer. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables CMCI.

  • Enabled—Enables CMCI. This is the default value.

HyperThreading [ALL] drop-down list

set IntelHyperThread

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

  • Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

Workload Configuration drop-down list

set WorkLdConfig

This feature allows for workload optimization. The options are Balanced and I/O Sensitive:

  • Balanced

  • IO Sensitive

Cores Enabled drop-down list

set CoreMultiProcessing

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

  • 1 through 48—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

UPI Link Frequency Select drop-down list

set QpiLinkSpeed

Note

 

UPI Link Frequency Select token is not applicable for single socket configuration.

This feature allows you to configure the Intel Ultra Path Interconnect (UPI) link speed between multiple sockets. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—This option configures the optimal link speed automatically.

  • 9.6 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 9.6GT/s.

  • 10.4 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 10.4GT/s

UPI Prefetch drop-down list

set KTIPrefetch

UPI prefetch is a mechanism to get the memory read started early on a DDR bus. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The UPI prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

  • Auto —CPU determines the UPI Prefetch mode.

Sub NUMA Clustering drop-down list

set SNC

Whether the CPU supports sub NUMA clustering, in which the tag directory and the memory channel are always in the same region. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled— Sub NUMA clustering does not occur.

  • enabled— Sub NUMA clustering occurs.

Power Performance Tuning drop-down list

set PwrPerfTuning

Determines if the BIOS or Operating System can turn on the energy performance bias tuning. The options are BIOS and OS.

  • BIOS—Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

  • OS—Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

  • PECI—Chooses Platform Environmental Control Interface for energy performance tuning.

XPT Prefetch drop-down list

set XPTPrefetch

Whether XPT prefetch is used to enable a read request sent to the last level cache to issue a copy of that request to the memory controller prefetcher. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The CPU does not use the XPT Prefetch option.

  • enabled—The CPU enables the XPT prefetch option.

Package C State

set PackageCstateLimit

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

  • no-limit—The server may enter any available C state.

  • auto —The CPU determines the physical elevation.

  • —The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C1 option. This requires less power than C1 or C0, but it takes the server slightly longer to return to high performance mode.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

Energy Performance Bias Config drop-down list

set CpuEngPerfBias

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • — The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with maximum power to keep reduce power consumption.

Hardware P-States drop-down list

set CpuHWPM

Enables processor Hardware P-State. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—HWPM is disabled.

  • hwpm-native-mode—HWPM native mode is enabled.

  • hwpm-oob-mode—HWPM Out-Of-Box mode is enabled.

  • Native Mode with no Legacy (only GUI)

LLC Prefetch drop-down list

set LLCPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the LLC Prefetch mechanism to fetch the date into the LLC. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The LLC prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Autonomous Core C-state drop-down list

set AutoCCState

Enables CPU Autonomous C-State, which converts the HALT instructions to the MWAIT instructions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is disabled.

  • Enabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is enabled.

Energy Efficient Turbo drop-down list

set EnergyEfficientTurbo

When energy efficient turbo is enabled, the optimal turbo frequency of the CPU turns dynamic based on CPU utilization. The power/performance bias setting also influences energy efficient turbo. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is disabled.

  • Enabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is enabled.

Patrol Scrub drop-down list

set PatrolScrub

Allows the system to actively search for, and correct, single bit memory errors even in unused portions of the memory on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The system checks for memory ECC errors only when the CPU reads or writes a memory address.

  • Enabled—The system periodically reads and writes memory searching for ECC errors. If any errors are found, the system attempts to fix them. This option may correct single bit errors before they become multi-bit errors, but it may adversely affect performance when the patrol scrub is running.

  • Enable at End of POST—The system checks for memory ECC errors after BIOS POST.

Processor EPP Profile drop-down list

set EPPProfile

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • Performance

  • Balanced Performance

  • Balanced Power

  • Power

Intel Dynamic Speed Select drop-down list

set IntelDynamicSpeedSelect

Intel Dynamic Speed Select modes allow you to run the CPU with different speed and cores in auto mode. This can be one of the following:

  • DisabledIntel Dynamic Speed Select is disabled.

  • EnabledIntel Dynamic Speed Select is enabled.

Intel Speed Select drop-down list

set IntelSpeedSelect

Intel Speed Select modes allows you to run the CPU with different speed and cores.

This can be one of the following:

  • Base— It will allow users to access maximum core and Thermal Design Power (TDP) ratio.

  • Config 3— It will allow users to access core and TDP ratio lesser than Base.

  • Config 4— It will allow users to access core and TDP ratio lesser than Config 3.

Default value: Base.

C225 M6 and C245 M6 Servers

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 32. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

MLOM OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN4—16GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

MRAID OptionROM

set PcieSlotMRAIDnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the RAID Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MRAID Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMRAIDnLinkSpeed

RAID IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

Front NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvmenLinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

Rear NVME-n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotRearNvmenOptionROM

Note

 

This options is applicable only to Cisco UCS C245 M6 servers.

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Rear NVME-n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotRearNvmenLinkSpeed

Note

 

This options is applicable only to Cisco UCS C245 M6 servers.

Link speed for NVMe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

PCIe Slot MSTOR Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDLinkSpeed

Link speed for PCIe front slot designated by slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

  • GEN4—Link speed can reach up to fourth generation.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

IPV4 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

PCIe ARI Support drop-down list

set PcieARISupport

Whether PCI Alternative Routing ID Interpretation (ARI) support in Windows is enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—ARI support is set to auto controlled by the system.

  • disabled—ARI support is not available.

  • enabled—ARI support is always available.

SR-IOV Support drop-down list

set SrIov

SR-IOV feature allows a PCIe device to appear to be multiple separate physical PCIe devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—SR-IOV feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—SR-IOV feature is enabled.

IPV6 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV6HTTP

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

IPV4 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV4HTTP

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

Network Stack drop-down list

set NetworkStack

This option allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 33. BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • COM 0—Enables console redirection on COM 1 during POST.

  • COM 1—Enables console redirection on COM 1 during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

PCIe Slots CDN Control drop-down list

set PcieSlotsCdnEnable

Note

 

This option is available only on Cisco UCS C245 M6 servers equipped with Mellanox cards in slots 2 or 5.

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

CDN Control drop-down list

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

set CiscoOpromLaunchOptimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Some controllers such as Onboard storage controllers, Emulex FC adapters, and GPU controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

BIOS Techlog Level

set CiscoDebugLevel

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

Serial Mux

set SerialMux

Enable or disable Serial Mux configuration.

  • Disabled— Support is disabled

  • Enabled— Support is enabled.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 34. BIOS Parameters in Security Management Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Security Device Support drop-down list

set TpmSupport

You should enable TPM support to enable security device support. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled if TPM is enabled.

Trusted Platform Module State drop-down list

set TPMControl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

SHA-1 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA1PCRBank

Enable or Disable SHA-1 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

SHA256 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA256PCRBank

Enable or Disable SHA256 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

SHA384 PCR Bank drop-down list

set SHA384PCRBank

The Platform Configuration Register (PCR) is a memory location in the TPM. Multiple PCRs are collectively referred to as a PCR bank. A Secure Hash Algorithm 384-bit or SHA-384PCR Bank allows to enable or disable TPM security.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use this feature.

  • Enabled—The server uses this feature.

Power ON Password drop-down list

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 35. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

NUMA Nodes per Socket drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnDramNps

Allows you to configure the memory NUMA domains per socket. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Number of channels is set to auto.

  • NPS0—One NUMA node per system.

  • NPS1—One NUMA node per socket.

  • NPS2—Two NUMA nodes per socket, one per Left/Right Half of the SoC.

  • NPS4—Four NUMA nodes per socket, one per Quadrant.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Chipselect Interleaving drop-down list

set CbsCmnMemMapBankInterleaveDdr4

Whether memory blocks across the DRAM chip selects for node 0 are interleaved. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Chip selects are not interleaved within the memory controller.

  • Auto—The CPU automatically determines how to interleave chip selects.

Memory interleaving Size drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnMemIntlvSize

Determines the size of the memory blocks to be interleaved. It also determines the starting address of the interleave (bit 8,9,10 or 11). This can be one of the following:

  • Auto

  • 256 Bytes

  • 512 Bytes

  • 1 KB

  • 2 KB

  • 4 KB

IOMMU drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbNbIOMMU

Input Output Memory Management Unit (IOMMU) allows AMD processors to map virtual addresses to physical addresses. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines how map these addresses.

  • Disabled—IOMMU is not used.

  • Enabled—Address mapping takes place through the IOMMU.

BankGroupSwap drop-down list

set CbsCmnMemCtrlBankGroupSwapDdr4

Determines how physical addresses are assigned to applications. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU automatically determines how to assign physical addresses to applications.

  • Disabled—Bank group swap is not used.

  • Enabled—Bank group swap is used to improve the performance of applications.

TSME drop-down list

set TSME

Allows you to enable Transparent Secure Memory Encryption (TSME). This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Feature usage is set to auto.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the TSME function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the TSME function.

SMEE drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuSmee

Whether the processor uses the Secure Memory Encryption Enable (SMEE) function, which provides memory encryption support. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines how map these addresses.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the SMEE function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the SMEE function.

SNP Memory Coverage drop-down list

set CbsDbgCpuSnpMemCover

Allows you to configure SNP memory coverage. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—System decides the memory coverage.

  • Disabled—The processor does not use this function.

  • Enabled—This feature is enabled.

  • Custom—Custom size can be defined in SNP Memory Size to Cover.

SEV-SNP Support drop-down list

set CbsSevSnpSupport

Allows you to enable Secure Nested Paging feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not use the SEV-SNP function.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the SEV-SNP function.

BME DMA Mitigation drop-down list

set BmeDmaMitigation

Allows you to disable the PCI BME bit to mitigate the threat from an unauthorized external DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCI BME bit is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCI BME bit is enabled in the BIOS.

SNP Memory Size to Cover in MB field

set CbsDbgCpuSnpMemSizeCover

Allows you to configure SNP memory size.

Burst and Postponed Refresh drop-down list

set BurstAndPostponedRefresh

  • disabled—The processor does not use the function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the function.

Post Package Repair drop-down list

set PostPackageRepair

Cisco IMC supports Hard-PPR, which permanently remaps accesses from a designated faulty row to a designated spare row. This can be one of the following:

  • Hard PPR—Support is enabled.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

Memory Interleaving drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnMemIntlvControl

Allows for disabling memory interleaving. Note that NUMA nodes per socket will be honored regardless of this setting. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Feature is set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

DRAM Scrub Time drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnDramScrubTime

Select a value to indicate the number of hours to scrub the entire memory. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto — Feature is set to auto mode.

  • Disabled — Support is disabled.

  • 1 hour

  • 4 hours

  • 8 hours

  • 16 hours

  • 24 hours

  • 48 hours

Memory Refresh Rate drop-down list

set MemoryRefreshRate

Controls the refresh rate of the memory controller and might affect the memory performance and power depending on memory configuration and workload. This can be one of the following:

  • 1x Refresh

  • 2x Refresh

PCIe Ten Bit Tag Support drop-down list

set CbsGnbDbgPcieTbtSupport

Enables PCIe ten bit tags for supported devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCIe ten bit tags support is enabled in the BIOS.

Memory Clock Speed 7xx2 drop-down list

set CbsCmnMemSpeedDdr47xx2

Allows the memory clock to be further reduced from the platform maximum. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto

  • 667 MHz

  • 800 MHz

  • 933 MHz

  • 1067 MHz

  • 1200 MHz

  • 1333 MHz

  • 1467 MHz

  • 1600 MHz

Memory Clock Speed 7xx3 drop-down list

set CbsCmnMemSpeedDdr47xx3

Allows the memory clock to be further reduced from the platform maximum. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto

  • 800 MHz

  • 933 MHz

  • 1067 MHz

  • 1200 MHz

  • 1333 MHz

  • 1467 MHz

  • 1600 MHz

  • 1633 MHz

  • 1667 MHz

  • 1700 MHz

  • 1733 MHz

  • 1767 MHz

  • 1800 MHz

  • 400 MHz

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 36. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Core Performance Boost drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuCpb

Whether the AMD processor increases its frequency on some cores when it is idle or not being used much. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to boost performance.

  • disabled—Core performance boost is disabled.

Global C-state Control drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuGlobalCstateCtrl

Whether the AMD processors control IO-based C-state generation and DF C-states This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to control IO-based C-state generation.

  • disabled—Global C-state control is disabled.

  • enabled—Global C-state control is enabled.

L1 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuL1StreamHwPrefetcher

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L1 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

L2 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuL2StreamHwPrefetcher

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L2 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Determinism Slider drop-down list

set CbsCmnDeterminismSlider

Allows AMD processors to determine how to operate. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default power determinism settings.

  • performance—Processor operates at the best performance in a consistent manner.

  • power—Processor operates at the maximum allowable performance on a per die basis.

CPPC drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbSMUCPPC

Allows you to configure Collaborative Processor Performance Control.

This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default CPPC settings.

  • disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • enabled—Collaborative Processor Performance is enabled.

Efficiency Mode Enable drop-down list

set CbsCmnEfficiencyModeEn

Allows you to configure power consumption based on efficiency.

This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default settings.

  • enabled—Efficiency mode is enabled.

Next patrol read schedule

This BIOS setting determines the scheduling and frequency of patrol read operations. Patrol reads are periodic scans of the system memory to detect and correct memory errors, which helps in maintaining memory integrity and reliability.

This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • enabled—Feature is enabled.

Next Consistency Check Schedule

This BIOS setting determines the scheduling and frequency of consistency check operations for RAID arrays. Consistency checks verify the integrity of data stored on RAID arrays by scanning the disks for errors and correcting any inconsistencies found.

This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • enabled—Feature is enabled.

Secure virtual drive

This BIOS setting enables or configures security features for virtual drives, often involving encryption to protect data. When enabled, data stored on the virtual drive is encrypted, making it inaccessible to unauthorized users or if the physical drives are removed from the system.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 37. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately check box

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

SVM Mode drop-down list

set SvmMode

Whether the processor uses AMD Secure Virtual Machine Technology. This can be one of the following: This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not use SVM Technology.

  • enabled—The processor uses SVM Technology.

SMT Mode drop-down list

set CbsCpuSmtCtrl

Whether the processor uses AMD Simultaneous MultiThreading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

  • disabled—The processor does not use SMT Mode.

  • enabled—The processor uses SMT Mode.

Downcore control 7xx2 drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuGenDowncoreCtrl

Note

 

This Token is applicable for Tehama servers with 7xx2 Model processors only.

The ability to remove one or more cores from operation is supported in the silicon. It may be desirable to reduce the number of cores due to OS restrictions, or power reduction requirements of the system. This item allows the control of how many cores are running. This setting can only reduce the number of cores from those available in the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how many cores need to be enabled.

  • TWO (1+1)—Two cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOUR (2+2)—Four cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SIX (3+3)—Six cores enabled on one CPU complex.

CPU Downcore control 7xx3 drop-down list

set CbsCpuCoreCtrl

Note

 

This Token is applicable for Tehama servers with 7xx3 Model processors only.

The ability to remove one or more cores from operation is supported in the silicon. It may be desirable to reduce the number of cores due to OS restrictions, or power reduction requirements of the system. This item allows the control of how many cores are running. This setting can only reduce the number of cores from those available in the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how many cores need to be enabled.

  • One (1+0)—One cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TWO (2+0)—Two cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • THREE (3+0)—Three cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • FOUR (4+0)—Four cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • Five (5+0)—Five cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SIX (6+0)—Six cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SEVEN (7+0)—Seven cores enabled on one CPU complex.

Fixed SOC P-State drop-down list

set CbsCmnFixedSocPstate

This option defines the target PState when APBDIS is set. Px – Specify a valid PState for the processor installed. This can be one of the following:

  • P0

  • P1

  • P2

  • P3

  • Auto

APBDIS drop-down list

set CbsCmnApbdis

Allows you to select the APB Disable value for the SMU. This can be one of the following:

  • 0—Clear ApbDis to SMU

  • 1—Set ApbDis to SMU.

  • auto—The CPU determines the value.

CCD Control drop-down list

set CbsCpuCcdCtrlSsp

Allows you to specify the number of CCDs that are desired to be enable in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The maximum CCDs provided by the processor is enabled.

  • 2 CCDs

  • 3 CCDs

  • 4 CCDs

  • 6 CCDs

Cisco xGMI Max Speed drop-down list

set CiscoXgmiMaxSpeed

This option enables 18 Gbps XGMI link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

ACPI SRAT L3 Cache As NUMA Domain drop-down list

set CbsDfCmnAcpiSratL3Numa

Creates a layer of virtual domains on top of the physical domains in which each CCX is declared to be in its on domain. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Use NPS settings for domain configuration.

  • Enabled— Each CCX is declared to be in its own domain.

Streaming Stores Control drop-down list

set CbsCmnCpuStreamingStoresCtrl

Enables the streaming stores functionality. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

Local APIC Mode drop-down list

set CbsDbgCpuLApicMode

This control selects the APIC mode to be used.

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Compatibility—Set to Compatibility mode.

  • XAPIC—Set to XAPIC mode.

  • X2APIC—Set to X2APIC mode.

DF C-States drop-down list

set CbsCmnGnbSMUDfCstates

When long duration idleness is expected in a system, this control allows the system to transition into a DF Cstate which can set the system into an even lower power state. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Long periods of idleness are not expected so no power savings would be achieved.

  • Enabled— This option is active, saving power when the system is very idle.

DLWM Support drop-down list

This value controls Dynamic Link Width Management (DLWM) feature. When the platform can support either an 8-lane or 16-lane xGMI operation, the dynamic adjustment feature can provide some power savings. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

EDC Control Throttle drop-down list

Enables or disables ‘EDC Shutdown Protection’ which enhances utilization tracking to avoid EDC shutdown responses to specific, aggressive workloads. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

Core Watchdog Timer Enable drop-down list

Enable or disable CPU Watchdog Timer. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Disabled—Feature is disabled.

  • Enabled—Feature is enabled.

xGMI Link Configuration drop-down list

Configures the number of xGMI2 links used on a multi-socket system. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • 2 xGMI Links—Set to 2 xGMI Links.

  • 3 xGMI Links—Set to 3 xGMI Links.

  • 4 xGMI Links—Set to 4 xGMI Links.

Preferred IO 7xx2 drop-down list

Enables the feature for a "preferred bus" as a performance improvement. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Manual—Set to manual mode.

Preferred IO 7xx3 drop-down list

Enables the feature for a "preferred bus" as a performance improvement. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Set to auto mode.

  • Bus—Set to bus mode.

For C125 Servers

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 38. BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab
Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • Serial Port A—Enables console redirection on serial port A during POST.

  • Serial Port B—Enables console redirection on serial port B during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

BIOS Techlog Level

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

Note

 

To disable the Fast Boot option, the end user must set the following tokens as mentioned below:

BIOS Techlog level to Normal

OptionROM Launch Optimization to Disabled.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Onboard storage controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

Default value: Enabled

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

CDN Control drop-down list

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled.

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 39. BIOS Parameters in Security Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Trusted Platform Module Support drop-down list

set TPMAdminCtrl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM ) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. It can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Power on Password drop-down list

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. It can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 40. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Memory Interleaving drop-down list

Whether the AMD CPU interleaves the physical memory so that the memory can be accessed while another is being refreshed. This controls fabric level memory interleaving. Channel, die and socket have requirements based on memory populations and will be ignored if the memory does not support the selected option.This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to interleave memory.

  • channel—Interleaves the physical address space over multiple channels, as opposed to each channel owning single consecutive address spaces.

  • die—Interleaves the physical address space over multiple dies, as opposed to each die owning single consecutive address spaces.

  • none—Consecutive memory blocks are accessed from the same physical memory.

  • socket—Interleaves the physical address space over multiple sockets, as opposed to each socket owning single consecutive address spaces.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Memory Interleaving Size drop-down list

Determines the size of the memory blocks to be interleaved. It also determines the starting address of the interleave (bit 8,9,10 or 11). This can be one of the following:

  • 1 KB

  • 2 KB

  • 256 Bytes

  • 512 Bytes

  • auto—The CPU determines the size of the memory block.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Chipselect Interleaving drop-down list

Whether memory blocks across the DRAM chip selects for node 0 are interleaved. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to interleave chip selects.

  • disabled—Chip selects are not interleaved within the memory controller.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Bank Group Swap drop-down list

Determines how physical addresses are assigned to applications. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to assign physical addresses to applications.

  • disabled—Bank group swap is not used.

  • enabled—Bank group swap is used to improve the performance of applications.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

IOMMU drop-down list

Input Output Memory Management Unit (IOMMU) allows AMD processors to map virtual addresses to physical addresses. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how map these addresses.

  • disabled—IOMMU is not used.

  • enabled—Address mapping takes place through the IOMMU.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

SMEE drop-down list

Whether the processor uses the Secure Memory Encryption Enable (SMEE) function, which provides memory encryption support. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not use the SMEE function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the SMEE function.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

TSME drop-down list

Whether the processor uses the Transparent Secure Memory Encryption (TSME) function, which provides memory encryption support. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not use the TSME function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the TSME function.

  • auto —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

SEV drop-down list

Enables running encrypted virtual machines (VMs) in which the code and data of the VM are isolated. This can be one of the following:

  • 253_ASIDs—The value is set to 253 Minimum Address Space Identifier (ASIDs).

  • 509_ASIDs—The value is set to 509 Minimum Address Space Identifier (ASIDs).

  • auto —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

DRAM SW Thermal Throttling drop-down list

Provides a protective mechanism to ensure that the software functions within the temperature limits. When the temperature exceeds the maximum threshold value, the performance is permitted to drop allowing to cool down to the minimum threshold value. This can be one of the following:
  • disabled—The processor does not use the function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the function.

  • auto —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Burst and Postponed Refresh drop-down list

  • disabled—The processor does not use the function.

  • enabled—The processor uses the function.

  • auto —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 41. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab
Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Pcie Slotn Oprom drop-down list

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPV6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPV6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPV6 PXE support is always available.

IPV4 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPV4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPV4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPV4 PXE support is always available.

SR-IOV Support drop-down list

set SrIov

Whether SR-IOV (Single Root I/O Virtualization) is enabled or disabled on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—SR-IOV is disabled.

  • Enabled—SR-IOV is enabled.

Front NVME n OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlot nOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe n slot. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe n slot.

  • enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe n slot

Front NVME n Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvme1LinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

PCIe ARI Support drop-down list

set PcieARISupport

Beginning with release 4.1(2a), Cisco IMC supports PCIe Alternative Routing ID (ARI) Interpretation feature. The PCIe specification supports greater numbers of virtual funtions through the implementation of ARI, which reinterprets the device number field in the PCIe header allowing for more than eight functions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCIe ARI Support is not available.

  • Enabled—PCIe ARI Support is available.

  • Auto—PCIe ARI Support is in auto mode.

IPV6 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV6HTTP

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv6 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 HTTP support is always available.

IPV4 HTTP Support drop-down list

set IPV4HTTP

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 42. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab
Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Core Performance Boost drop-down list

Whether the AMD processor increases its frequency on some cores when it is idle or not being used much. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to boost performance.

  • disabled—Core performance boost is disabled.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Global C-state Control drop-down list

Whether the AMD processors control IO-based C-state generation and DF C-states This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically determines how to control IO-based C-state generation.

  • disabled—Global C-state control is disabled.

  • enabled—Global C-state control is enabled.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

L1 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L1 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

L2 Stream HW Prefetcher drop-down list

Whether the processor allows the AMD hardware prefetcher to speculatively fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the L2 cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU determines how to place data from I/O devices into the processor cache.

  • disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Determinism Slider drop-down list

Allows AMD processors to determine how to operate. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The CPU automatically uses default power determinism settings.

  • performance—Processor operates at the best performance in a consistent manner.

  • power—Processor operates at the maximum allowable performance on a per die basis.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 43. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

SMT Mode drop-down list

Whether the processor uses AMD Simultaneous MultiThreading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • auto—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

  • off—The processor does not permit multithreading.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

SVM Mode drop-down list

Whether the processor uses AMD Secure Virtual Machine Technology. This can be one of the following: This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not use SVM Technology.

  • enabled—The processor uses SVM Technology.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

Downcore control drop-down list

Allows AMD processors to disable cores and, thus, select how many cores to enable. This can be one of the following:

  • FOUR (2+2)—Two cores enabled on each CPU complex.

  • FOUR (4+0)—Four cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • SIX (3+3)—Three cores enabled on each CPU complex.

  • THREE (3+0)—Three cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • TWO (1+1)—Two cores enabled on each CPU complex.

  • TWO (2+0)—Two cores enabled on one CPU complex.

  • auto—The CPU determines how many cores need to be enabled.

  • platform-default —The BIOS uses the value for this attribute contained in the BIOS defaults for the server type and vendor.

C220 M5, C240 M5, C240 SD M5, and C480 M5 Servers

I/O Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 44. BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab
Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Legacy USB Support drop-down list

set UsbLegacySupport

Whether the system supports legacy USB devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—USB devices are only available to EFI applications.

  • Enabled—Legacy USB support is always available.

Intel VT for directed IO drop-down list

set IntelVTD

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Note

 

If you change this option, you must power cycle the server before the setting takes effect.

Intel VTD coherency support drop-down list

set CoherencySupport

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Coherency. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support coherency.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Coherency as required.

Intel VTD ATS support drop-down list

set ATS

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Address Translation Services (ATS). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support ATS.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d ATS as required.

VMD Enable drop-down list

Intel Volume Management Device (VMD) is for PCIe NVMe SSDs that provides hardware logic to manage and aggregate NVMe SSDs.

This can be one the following:

  • Enabled— Enables benefits like robust surprise hot-plug, status LED management.

  • Disabled— Disables benefits like robust surprise hot-plug, status LED management.

Default value: Disabled.

Refer Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU User Guide and Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU (Intel® VROC) to configure VMD.

PCIe RAS Support drop-down list

Whether PCIe RAS Support is available on the PCIe slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled— PCIe RAS is available on the slot.

  • Disabled— PCIe RAS is not available on port.

Details of VMD supported and unsupported ports for Cisco UCS C480 M5 servers:

Cisco UCS C480 NVMe SKU (32 drive NVME System)

  • DMI connected ports 7, 8, and 23 do not support VMD.

  • All other twenty nine ports support VMD.

Cisco UCS C480 Non-NVMe SKU

  • DMI connected ports 1, 2, and 18 do not support VMD.

  • Ports 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 16, 17, 23, 24 support VMD.

All Onboard LOM Ports drop-down list

Whether all LOM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled— All LOM ports are enabled.

  • Disabled— All LOM ports are disabled.

LOM Port 0 OptionROM drop-down list

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port 0. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available on LOM port 0.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available on LOM port 0.

LOM Port 1 OptionROM

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port 1. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available on LOM port 1.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available on LOM port 1.

PCIe Slot nOptionROMdrop-down list

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe Cards.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available on slot n.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available on slot n.

MRAID OptionROM

Whether the server can use the RAID Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MLOM Oprom drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

HBA Oprom drop-down list

set PcieSlotHBAOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot.

Front NVME1 Oprom drop-down list

set PcieSlotN1OptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME2 Oprom drop-down list

set PcieSlotN2OptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot.

  • Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot

HBA Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotHBALinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotMLOMLinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

MRAID Link Speed drop-down list

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in MRAID slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

  • Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotnLinkSpeed

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Front NVME1 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvme1LinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot 1. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Front NVME2 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotFrontNvme2LinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe front slot 2. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Rear NVME1 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotRearNvme1LinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe rear slot 1. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Rear NVME2 Link Speed drop-down list

set PcieSlotRearNvme2LinkSpeed

Link speed for NVMe rear slot 2. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

  • Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

  • GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

  • GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

  • GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

VGA Priority drop-down list

set VgaPriority

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • OnBoard—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

  • OffBoard—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

  • OnBoard VGA Disabled—Priority is given to the PCIe Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled. The vKVM does not function when the onboard VGA is disabled.

P-SATA OptionROM drop-down list

set pSATA

Allows you to select the PCH SATA optionROM mode. This can be one of the following:

  • LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid.

  • Disabled— Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

M2.SATA OptionROM drop-down list

set SataModeSelect

Mode of operation of Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) Solid State Drives (SSD). This can be one of the following:

  • AHCI

    Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to AHCI mode.

  • LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid.

  • Disabled— Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

USB Port Rear drop-down list

set UsbPortRear

Whether the rear panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port Front drop-down list

set UsbPortFront

Whether the front panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port Internal drop-down list

set UsbPortInt

Whether the internal USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port KVM drop-down list

set UsbPortKVM

Whether the vKVM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the vKVM keyboard and/or mouse devices. Keyboard and/or mouse will not work in the KVM window.

  • Enabled— Enables the vKVM keyboard and/or mouse devices.

USB Port Internal drop-down list

Whether the USB Port Internal is enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

  • Disabled— Disables the USB Port Internal. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled— Enables the USB Port Internal. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV6PXE

Enables or disables IPv6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

IPv4 HTTP Support

Enables or disables IPv4 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 HTTP support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 HTTP support is always available.

IPv6 HTTP Support

Enables or disables IPv6 support for HTTP. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv6 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv6 PXE support is always available.

PCIe PLL SSC drop-down list

set PciePllSsc

Enable this feature to reduce EMI interference by down spreading clock 0.5%. Disable this feature to centralize the clock without spreading.

This can be one of the following:

  • auto—EMI interference is auto adjusted.

    Disabled—EMI interference is auto adjusted.

  • ZeroPointFive—EMI interference is reduced by down spreading the clock 0.5%.

IPV4 PXE Support drop-down list

set IPV4PXE

Enables or disables IPv4 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—IPv4 PXE support is not available.

  • enabled—IPv4 PXE support is always available.

Network Stack drop-down list

set NetworkStack

This option allows you to monitor IPv6 and IPv4. This can be one of the following

  • disabled—Network Stack support is not available.

    Note

     

    When disabled, the value set for IPV4 PXE Support does not impact the system.

  • enabled—Network Stack support is always available.

External SSC enable drop-down list

set EnableClockSpreadSpec

This option allows you to reduce the EMI of your motherboard by modulating the signals it generates so that the spikes are reduced to flatter curves.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Clock Spread Spectrum support is not available.

  • Enabled—Clock Spread Spectrum support is always available.

PCIe Slot MSTOR RAID OptionROM drop-down list

set PcieSlotMSTORRAIDOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe MSTOR RAID. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Option ROM is not available.

  • Enabled—Option ROM is available.

Server Management Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 45. BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab
Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Baud Rate drop-down list

set BaudRate

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

  • 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

  • 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

  • 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Console Redirection drop-down list

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

  • Serial Port A—Enables console redirection on serial port A during POST.

  • Serial Port B—Enables console redirection on serial port B during POST.

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

Adaptive Memory Training

When this option is Enabled:

The Memory training will not happen in every boot but the BIOS will use the saved memory training result in every re-boot.

Some exceptions when memory training happens in every boot are:

BIOS update, CMOS reset, CPU or Memory configuration change, SPD or run-time uncorrectable error or the last boot has occurred more than 24 hours before.

When this option is Disabled, the Memory training happens in every boot.

Default value: Enabled.

Note

 

To disable the Fast Boot option, the end user must set the following tokens as mentioned below:

Adaptive Memory Training to Disabled

BIOS Techlog level to Normal

OptionROM Launch Optimization to Disabled.

BIOS Techlog Level

This option denotes the type of messages in BIOS tech log file.

The log file can be one of the following types:
  • Minimum - Critical messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Normal - Warning and loading messages will be displayed in the log file.

  • Maximum - Normal and information related messages will be displayed in the log file.

Default value: Minimum.

Note

 

This option is mainly for internal debugging purposes.

OptionROM Launch Optimization

When this option is Enabled, the OptionROMs only for the controllers present in the boot order policy will be launched.

Note

 

Some controllers such as Onboard storage controllers, Emulex FC adapters, and GPU controllers though not listed in the boot order policy will have the OptionROM launched.

When this option is Disabled, all the OptionROMs will be launched.

Default value: Enabled

CDN Control drop-down list

set cdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

Flow Control drop-down list

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Terminal type drop-down list

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

PCIe Slots CDN Control drop-down list

set PcieSlotsCdnEnable

Note

 

This option is available only on Cisco UCS C240 M5 servers equipped with Qlogic cards in slots 2 or 5.

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

Security Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 46. BIOS Parameters in Security Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Trusted Platform Module State drop-down list

set TPMAdminCtrl

Trusted Platform Module (TPM ) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. It can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

SHA-1 PCR Bank

Enable or Disable SHA-1 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

SHA256 PCR Bank

Enable or Disable SHA256 PCR Bank. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Intel Trusted Execution Technology Support

Can be Enabled only when Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is Enabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Power ON Password drop-down list

set PowerOnPassword

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. It can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Processor Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 47. BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Description

Intel Virtualization Technology drop-down list

set IntelVT

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Extended APIC drop-down list

set LocalX2Apic

Allows you to enable or disable extended APIC support. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Enables APIC support

  • Disabled—Disables APIC support.

Processor C1E drop-down list

set ProcessorC1E

Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

  • Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

Processor C6 Report drop-down list

set ProcessorC6Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C6 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C6 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

  • Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Note

 

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

Execute Disable Bit drop-down list

set ExecuteDisable

Classifies memory areas on the server to specify where application code can execute. As a result of this classification, the processor disables code execution if a malicious worm attempts to insert code in the buffer. This setting helps to prevent damage, worm propagation, and certain classes of malicious buffer overflow attacks. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not classify memory areas.

  • Enabled—The processor classifies memory areas.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Turbo Mode drop-down list

set IntelTurboBoostTech

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost Technology if required.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

EIST PSD Function drop-down list

EIST reduces the latency inherent with changing the voltage-frequency pair (P-state), thus allowing those transitions to occur more frequently. This allows for more granular, demand-based switching and can optimize the power-to-performance balance, based on the demands of the applications. This can be one of the following:

  • HW ALL: The processor is coordinates the P-state among logical processors dependencies. The OS keeps the P-state request up to date on all logical processors.

  • SW ALL: The OS Power Manager coordinates the P-state among logical processors with dependencies and initiates the transition on all of those Logical Processors.

SpeedStep (Pstates) drop-down list

set EnhancedIntelSpeedStep

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

HyperThreading [ALL] drop-down list

set IntelHyperThread

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

  • Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

Cores Enabled drop-down list

set CoreMultiProcessing

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

  • 1 through 27—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

Note

 

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Processor CMCI drop-down list

set ProcessorCMCI

Allows the CPU to trigger interrupts on corrected machine check events. The corrected machine check interrupt (CMCI) allows faster reaction than the traditional polling timer. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables CMCI.

  • Enabled—Enables CMCI. This is the default value.

Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Tech drop-down list

set EnhancedIntelSpeedStep

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Workload Configuration drop-down list

set WorkLdConfig

This feature allows for workload optimization. The options are Balanced and I/O Sensitive:

  • NUMA

  • UMA

Sub NUMA Clustering drop-down list

Whether the CPU supports sub NUMA clustering, in which the tag directory and the memory channel are always in the same region. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled— Sub NUMA clustering does not occur.

  • enabled— Sub NUMA clustering occurs.

  • auto — The BIOS determines what Sub NUMA clustering is done.

Energy/Performance Bias Config

Displays the energy or performance bias configuration.

This can be one of the following:

  • Balanced Performance

  • Performance

  • Balanced Power

  • Power

XPT Prefetch drop-down list

Whether XPT prefetch is used to enable a read request sent to the last level cache to issue a copy of that request to the memory controller prefetcher. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The CPU does not use the XPT Prefetch option.

  • enabled—The CPU enables the XPT prefetch option.

UPI Prefetch drop-down list

UPI prefetch is a mechanism to get the memory read started early on a DDR bus. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The UPI prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Energy Performance Bias Config drop-down list

set CpuEngPerfBias

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • — The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

  • — The server provides all server components with maximum power to keep reduce power consumption.

Power Performance Tuning drop-down list

set PwrPerfTuning

Determines if the BIOS or Operating System can turn on the energy performance bias tuning. The options are BIOS and OS.

  • bios

    Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

  • os

    Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

LLC Prefetch drop-down list

Whether the processor uses the LLC Prefetch mechanism to fetch the date into the LLC. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • enabled—The LLC prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Package C State

set package-c-state-limit-config package-c-state-limit

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

  • no-limit—The server may enter any available C state.

  • auto —The CPU determines the physical elevation.

  • —The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C1 option. This requires less power than C1 or C0, but it takes the server slightly longer to return to high performance mode.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

  • —When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

Hardware P-States drop-down list

set CpuHWPM

Enables processor Hardware P-State. This can be one of the following:

  • disabled—HWPM is disabled.

  • hwpm-native-mode—HWPM native mode is enabled.

  • hwpm-oob-mode—HWPM Out-Of-Box mode is enabled.

  • Native Mode with no Legacy (only GUI)

Intel Speed Select drop-down list

set IntelSpeedSelect

Intel Speed Select modes will allow users to run the CPU with different speed and cores.

This can be one of the following:

  • Base— It will allow users to access maximum core and Thermal Design Power (TDP) ratio.

  • Config 1— It will allow users to access core and TDP ratio lesser than Base.

  • Config 2— It will allow users to access core and TDP ratio lesser than Config 1.

Default value: Base.

Uncore Frequency Scaling drop-down list

set UFSDisable

This feature allows you configure the scaling of uncore frequency of the processor. This can be one of the following:

  • enabled—Uncore frequency of the processor scales up or down based on the load.

  • disabled—Uncore frequency of the processor remains fixed.

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the fixed higher and lower values for Uncore Frequency Scaling.

Configurable TDP Level drop-down list

set ConfigTDPLevel

Configurable TDP Level feature allows adjustments in processor thermal design power values. By modifying the processor behavior and the performance levels, power consumption of a processor can be configured and TDP can be adjusted as the same time. Hence, a processor operates at higher or lower performance levels, depending on the available cooling capacities and desired power consumption. This can be one of the following:

  • Normal

  • Level 1

  • Level 2

Refer Intel® Dear Customer Letter (DCL) to know the values for TDP level.

UPI Link Speed drop-down list

set QpiLinkSpeed

Note

 

UPI Link Frequency Select token is not applicable for single socket configuration.

This feature allows you to configure the Intel Ultra Path Interconnect (UPI) link speed between multiple sockets. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—This option configures the optimal link speed automatically.

  • 9.6 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 9.6GT/s.

  • 10.4 GT/s—This option configures the optimal link speed at 10.4GT/s

Energy Efficient Turbo drop-down list

set EnergyEfficientTurbo

When energy efficient turbo is enabled, the optimal turbo frequency of the CPU turns dynamic based on CPU utilization. The power/performance bias setting also influences energy efficient turbo. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is disabled.

  • Enabled—Energy Efficient Turbo is enabled.

Processor EPP Enable

Displays the selected value for Processor EPP Enable.

  • Disabled—Processor EPP Enable is disabled.

  • Enabled—Processor EPP Enable is enabled.

Autonomous Core C-state drop-down list

set AutoCCState

Enables CPU Autonomous C-State, which converts the HALT instructions to the MWAIT instructions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is disabled.

  • Enabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is enabled.

Patrol Scrub drop-down list

set PatrolScrub

Allows the system to actively search for, and correct, single bit memory errors even in unused portions of the memory on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The system checks for memory ECC errors only when the CPU reads or writes a memory address.

  • Enabled—The system periodically reads and writes memory searching for ECC errors. If any errors are found, the system attempts to fix them. This option may correct single bit errors before they become multi-bit errors, but it may adversely affect performance when the patrol scrub is running.

  • Enable at End of POST—The system checks for memory ECC errors after BIOS POST.

Processor EPP Profile drop-down list

set EPPProfile

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • Performance

  • Balanced Performance

  • Balanced Power

  • Power

Memory Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 48. BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Select Memory RAS configuration drop-down list

set SelectMemoryRAS

Determines how the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Maximum Performance—System performance is optimized.

  • ADDDC Sparing—Adaptive virtual lockstep is an algorithm implemented in the hardware and firmware to support the ADDDC mode. When selected, the system performance is optimized till the algorithm is activated. The algorithm is activated in case of DRAM device failure. Once the algorithm is activated, the virtual lockstep regions are activated to map out the failed region during run-time dynamically, and the performance impact is restricted at a region level.

  • Mirror Mode 1LM—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

  • Partial Mirror Mode 1LM—Partial DIMM Mirroring creates a mirrored copy of a specific region of memory cells, rather than keeping the complete mirror copy. Partial Mirroring creates a mirrored region in memory map with the attributes of a partial mirror copy. Up to 50% of the total memory capacity can be mirrored, using up to 4 partial mirrors.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

DCPMM Firmware Downgrade drop-down list

set DCPMMFirmwareDowngrade

Whether the BIOS supports downgrading the DCPMM firmware. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Partial Memory Mirror Mode drop-down list

set PartialMirrorModeConfig

The partial memory size is either in percentage or in GB. This can be one of the following:

  • Percentage—The partial memory mirror is defined in percentage.

  • Value in GB—The partial memory mirror is defined in GB.

  • Disabled—Partial memory mirror is disabled.

Partial Mirror percentage field

set PartialMirrorPercent

Percentage of memory to mirror above 4GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 50.

Partial Mirror1 Size in GB field

set PartialMirrorValue1

Size of the first partial memory mirror in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

Note

 

The combined memory size of all the partial mirror should not exceed 50% of the physical memory size.

Partial Mirror2 Size in GB field

set PartialMirrorValue2

Size of the second partial memory mirror in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

Note

 

The combined memory size of all the partial mirror should not exceed 50% of the physical memory size.

Partial Mirror3 Size in GB field

set PartialMirrorValue3

Size of the third partial memory mirror in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

Note

 

The combined memory size of all the partial mirror should not exceed 50% of the physical memory size.

Partial Mirror4 Size in GB field

set PartialMirrorValue4

Size of the fourth partial memory mirror in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

Note

 

The combined memory size of all the partial mirror should not exceed 50% of the physical memory size.

Memory Size Limit in GB field

set MemorySizeLimit

Use this option to reduce the size of the physical memory limit in GB.

Enter an integer between 0 and 65535.

NUMA drop-down list

set NUMAOptimize

Whether the BIOS supports Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

BME DMA Mitigation drop-down list

set BmeDmaMitigation

Allows you to disable the PCI BME bit to mitigate the threat from an unauthorized external DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—PCI BME bit is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Enabled—PCI BME bit is enabled in the BIOS.

Select PPR Type drop-down list

set SelectPprType

Cisco IMC supports Hard-PPR, which permanently remaps accesses from a designated faulty row to a designated spare row.

This can be one of the following:

  • Hard PPR—Support is enabled.

    Note

     

    Hard PPR can be used only when Memory RAS Configuration is set to ADDDC Sparing. For other RAS selections, this setting should be set to Disabled.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

CR QoS drop-down list

CRQoS

Enables you to select the CR QoS tuning.

This can be one of the following:

  • Recipe 1—For QoS knobs and is recommended for 2-2-2 memory configuration in active directory.

  • Recipe 2—For QoS knobs and is recommended for other memory configuration in active directory.

  • Recipe 3—For QoS knobs and is recommended for 1 DIMM per channel configuration.

  • DisabledCR QoS feature is disabled.

Snoopy mode for AD drop-down list

SnoopyModeForAD

Enables new AD specific feature to avoid directory updates to DDRT memory from non-NUMA optimized workloads.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

CR FastGo Config drop-down list

CrfastgoConfig

Enables you to select CR QoS configuration profiles.

This can be one of the following:

  • Default

  • Option 1

  • Option 2

  • Option 3

  • Option 4

  • Option 5

  • Auto

NVM Performance Setting drop-down list

NvmdimmPerformConfig

Enables you to configure NVM baseline performance settings depending on the workload behavior.

  • BW Optimized

  • Latency Optimized

  • Balanced Profile

Snoopy mode for 2LM drop-down list

SnoopyModeFor2LM

Enables you to avoid directory updates to far-memory from non-NUMA optimized workloads.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Memory Thermal Throttling Mode drop-down list

MemoryThermalThrottling

This function is used for adjusting memory temperature. If memory temperature is excessively high after the function is enabled, the memory access rate is reduced and Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) adjusts the fan to cool down the memory to avoid any DIMM damage.

This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • CLTT with PECI—Enables Closed Loop Thermal Throttling with Platform Environment Control Interface.

Memory Refresh Rate drop-down list

MemoryRefreshRate

Enables you to increase or decrease memory refresh rate. Increasing the DRAM refresh rate reduces the maximum number of activates (hammers) that can occur before the next refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • 1X Refresh—Refresh rate is at minimum.

  • 2X Refresh —Refresh is 2X faster.

Panic and High Watermark drop-down list

PanicHighWatermark

When set to low, the memory controller does not postpone refreshes while Memory Refresh Rate is set to 1X Refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • Low—Refresh rate is set to low.

  • High —Refresh rate is set to high.

Advanced Memory Test drop-down list

AdvancedMemTest

Note

 

This feature is applicable only to Samsung, Hynix and Micron DIMMs.

You can enable advance DIMM testing during BIOS POST using this feature. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Enhanced Memory Test drop-down list

This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—Support is set to Auto.

  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Power/Performance Tab


Note


BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.


Table 49. BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab
Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Hardware Prefetcher drop-down list

set HardwarePrefetch

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher drop-down list

set AdjacentCacheLinePrefetch

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even or odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

  • Enabled—The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

DCU Streamer Prefetch drop-down list

set DcuStreamerPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

  • Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

DCU IP Prefetcher drop-down list

set DcuIpPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

CPU Performance drop-down list

set CPUPerformance

Sets the CPU performance profile for the options listed above. This can be one of the following:

  • Enterprise—All options are enabled.

  • HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

  • Hight Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

  • Custom—All performance profile options can be configured from the BIOS setup on the server. In addition, the Hardware Prefetcher and Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch options can be configured as well.

C460 M4 Servers

Main Tab for C460 M4 Servers

Main BIOS Parameters

Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

TPM Support

set TPMAdminCtrl

TPM (Trusted Platform Module) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. It can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Power ON Password Support drop-down

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. It can be one of the following:
  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Actions Area

Name Description

Save button

Saves the settings for the BIOS parameter and closes the dialog box.

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Reset button

Resets the values for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to the settings that were in effect when this dialog box was first opened.

Restore Defaults button

Sets the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to their default settings.

Advanced Tab for C460 M4 Servers

Reboot Server Option

If you want your changes applied automatically after you click Save Changes, check the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC immediately reboots the server and applies your changes.

If you want to apply your changes at a later time, clear the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC stores the changes and applies them the next time the server reboots.


Note


If there are existing BIOS parameter changes pending, Cisco IMC automatically overwrites the stored values with the current settings when you click Save Changes.


Processor Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Intel Hyper-Threading Technology

set IntelHyperThread

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

  • Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Number of Enabled Cores

set CoreMultiProcessing

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

  • 1 through n—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Execute Disable

set ExecuteDisable

Classifies memory areas on the server to specify where application code can execute. As a result of this classification, the processor disables code execution if a malicious worm attempts to insert code in the buffer. This setting helps to prevent damage, worm propagation, and certain classes of malicious buffer overflow attacks. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not classify memory areas.

  • Enabled—The processor classifies memory areas.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Intel VT

set IntelVT

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Note

 

If you change this option, you must power cycle the server before the setting takes effect.

Intel VT-d

set IntelVTD

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O (VT-d). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not use virtualization technology.

  • Enabled—The processor uses virtualization technology.

Intel(R) Interrupt Remapping drop-down list

set InterruptRemap

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Interrupt Remapping. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support remapping.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Interrupt Remapping as required.

Intel(R) Passthrough DMA drop-down list

set PassThroughDMA

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Pass-through DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support pass-through DMA.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Pass-through DMA as required.

Intel VT-d Coherency Support

set CoherencySupport

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Coherency. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support coherency.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Coherency as required.

Intel VT-d ATS Support

set ATS

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Address Translation Services (ATS). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support ATS.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d ATS as required.

CPU Performance

set CPUPerformance

Sets the CPU performance profile for the server. The performance profile consists of the following options:

  • DCU Streamer Prefetcher

  • DCU IP Prefetcher

  • Hardware Prefetcher

  • Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch

This can be one of the following:

  • Enterprise—All options are enabled.

  • High_Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

  • HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

  • Custom—All performance profile options can be configured from the BIOS setup on the server. In addition, the Hardware Prefetcher and Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch options can be configured in the fields below.

Hardware Prefetcher

set HardwarePrefetch

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher

set AdjacentCacheLinePrefetch

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even/odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

  • Enabled— The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

DCU Streamer Prefetch

set DcuStreamerPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

  • Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

DCU IP Prefetcher

set DcuIpPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Direct Cache Access Support

set DirectCacheAccess

Allows processors to increase I/O performance by placing data from I/O devices directly into the processor cache. This setting helps to reduce cache misses. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Data from I/O devices is not placed directly into the processor cache.

  • Enabled—Data from I/O devices is placed directly into the processor cache.

Power Technology

set CPUPowerManagement

Enables you to configure the CPU power management settings for the following options:

  • Enhanced Intel Speedstep Technology

  • Intel Turbo Boost Technology

  • Processor Power State C6

Power Technology can be one of the following:

  • Custom—The server uses the individual settings for the BIOS parameters mentioned above. You must select this option if you want to change any of these BIOS parameters.

  • Disabled—The server does not perform any CPU power management and any settings for the BIOS parameters mentioned above are ignored.

  • Energy_Efficient—The server determines the best settings for the BIOS parameters mentioned above and ignores the individual settings for these parameters.

Enhanced Intel Speedstep Technology

set EnhancedIntelSpeedStep

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Intel Turbo Boost Technology

set IntelTurboBoostTech

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost Technology if required.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor C3 Report

set ProcessorC3Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C3 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C3 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—BIOS does not send C3 report.

  • Enabled—BIOS sends the C3 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C3 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor C6 Report

set ProcessorC6Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C6 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C6 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

  • Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor Power State C1 Enhanced

set ProcessorC1EReport

Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

  • Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

P-STATE Coordination

set PsdCoordType

Allows you to define how BIOS communicates the P-state support model to the operating system. There are 3 models as defined by the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) specification.

  • HW_ALL—The processor hardware is responsible for coordinating the P-state among logical processors with dependencies (all logical processors in a package).

  • SW_ALL—The OS Power Manager (OSPM) is responsible for coordinating the P-state among logical processors with dependencies (all logical processors in a physical package), and must initiate the transition on all of the logical processors.

  • SW_ANY—The OS Power Manager (OSPM) is responsible for coordinating the P-state among logical processors with dependencies (all logical processors in a package), and may initiate the transition on any of the logical processors in the domain.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

SINGLE_PCTL drop-down list

get SinglePCTLEn

Facilitates single PCTL support for better processor power management. This can be one of the following:

  • No

  • Yes

Config TDP drop-down list

get ConfigTDP

Allows you to configure the Thermal Design Power (TDP) settings for the system. TDP is the maximum amount of power allowed for running applications without triggering an overheating event. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the TDP settings. This is the default value.

  • Enabled—Enables the TDP settings.

Energy Performance Tuning

set PwrPerfTuning

Allows you to choose BIOS or Operating System for energy performance bias tuning. This can be one of the following:

  • OS— Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

  • BIOS— Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

Energy Performance

set CpuEngPerfBias

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • Balanced_Energy

  • Balanced_Performance

  • Energy_Efficient

  • Performance

Package C State Limit

set PackageCStateLimit

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

  • C0_state—The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • C1_state—When the CPU is idle, the system slightly reduces the power consumption. This option requires less power than C0 and allows the server to return quickly to high performance mode.

  • C3_state—When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C1 option. This requires less power than C1 or C0, but it takes the server slightly longer to return to high performance mode.

  • C6_state—When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

  • C7_state—When the CPU is idle, the server makes a minimal amount of power available to the components. This option saves the maximum amount of power but it also requires the longest time for the server to return to high performance mode.

  • No_Limit—The server may enter any available C state.

Extended APIC

set LocalX2Apic

Allows you to enable or disable extended APIC support. This can be one of the following:

  • XAPIC—Enables APIC support.

  • X2APIC—Enables APIC and also enables Intel VT-d and Interrupt Remapping .

Workload Configuration

set WorkLdConfig

Allows you to set a parameter to optimize workload characterization. This can be one of the following:

  • Balanced— Chooses balanced option for optimization.

  • I/O Sensitive— Chooses I/O sensitive option for optimization.

Note

 

We recommend you to set the workload configuration to Balanced.

IIO Error Enable drop-down list

get IohErrorEn

Allows you to generate the IIO-related errors. This can be one of the following:
  • Yes

  • No

Memory Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Select Memory RAS

set SelectMemoryRAS

How the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Maximum_Performance—System performance is optimized.

  • Mirroring—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

  • Lockstep—If the DIMM pairs in the server have an identical type, size, and organization and are populated across the SMI channels, you can enable lockstep mode to minimize memory access latency and provide better performance. This option offers better system performance than Mirroring and better reliability than Maximum Performance but lower reliability than Mirroring and lower system performance than Maximum Performance.

DRAM Clock Throttling

set DRAMClockThrottling

Allows you to tune the system settings between the memory bandwidth and power consumption. This can be one of the following:

  • Balanced— DRAM clock throttling is reduced, providing a balance between performance and power.

  • Performance—DRAM clock throttling is disabled, providing increased memory bandwidth at the cost of additional power.

  • Energy_Efficient—DRAM clock throttling is increased to improve energy efficiency.

Low Voltage DDR Mode

set LvDDRMode

Whether the system prioritizes low voltage or high frequency memory operations. This can be one of the following:

  • Power_Saving_Mode—The system prioritizes low voltage memory operations over high frequency memory operations. This mode may lower memory frequency in order to keep the voltage low.

  • Performance_Mode—The system prioritizes high frequency operations over low voltage operations.

Closed Loop Therm Throt drop-down list

set closedLoopThermThrotl

Allows for the support of Closed-Loop Thermal Throttling, which improves reliability and reduces CPU power consumption through the automatic voltage control while the CPUs are in the idle state. This can be one of the following:
  • Disabled—Disables closed loop thermal throttling.

  • Enabled—Enables closed loop thermal throttling. This is the default value.

Channel Interleaving

set ChannelInterLeave

Whether the CPU divides memory blocks and spreads contiguous portions of data across interleaved channels to enable simultaneous read operations. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines what interleaving is done.

  • 1_Way—Some channel interleaving is used.

  • 2_Way

  • 3_Way

  • 4_Way—The maximum amount of channel interleaving is used.

Rank Interleaving

set RankInterLeave

Whether the CPU interleaves physical ranks of memory so that one rank can be accessed while another is being refreshed. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines what interleaving is done.

  • 1_Way—Some rank interleaving is used.

  • 2_Way

  • 4_Way

  • 8_Way—The maximum amount of rank interleaving is used.

Patrol Scrub

set PatrolScrub

Whether the system actively searches for, and corrects, single bit memory errors even in unused portions of the memory on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The system checks for memory ECC errors only when the CPU reads or writes a memory address.

  • Enabled—The system periodically reads and writes memory searching for ECC errors. If any errors are found, the system attempts to fix them. This option may correct single bit errors before they become multi-bit errors, but it may adversely affect performance when the patrol scrub is running.

Demand Scrub

set DemandScrub

Whether the system corrects single bit memory errors encountered when the CPU or I/O makes a demand read. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— Single bit memory errors are not corrected.

  • Enabled— Single bit memory errors are corrected in memory and the corrected data is set in response to the demand read.

Altitude

set Altitude

The approximate number of meters above sea level at which the physical server is installed. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines the physical elevation.

  • 300_M—The server is approximately 300 meters above sea level.

  • 900_M—The server is approximately 900 meters above sea level.

  • 1500_M—The server is approximately 1500 meters above sea level.

  • 3000_M—The server is approximately 3000 meters above sea level.

Panic and High Watermark drop-down list

PanicHighWatermark

When set to low, the memory controller does not postpone refreshes while Memory Refresh Rate is set to 1X Refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • Low—Refresh rate is set to low.

  • High —Refresh rate is set to high.

QPI Configuration Parameters

Name Description

QPI Link Frequency Select

set QPILinkFrequency

The Intel QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) link frequency, in gigatransfers per second (GT/s). This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines the QPI link frequency.

  • 6.4_GT/s

  • 7.2_GT/s

  • 8.0_GT/s

QPI Snoop Mode

set QpiSnoopMode

The Intel QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) snoop mode. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the QPI snoop mode.

  • Cluster on Die—Enables Cluster On Die. When enabled LLC is split into two parts with an independent caching agent for each. This helps increase the performance in some workloads. This mode is available only for processors that have 10 or more cores. It is the best mode for highly NUMA optimized workloads.

  • Auto—The CPU automatically recognizes this as Early Snoop mode. This is the default value.

USB Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Legacy USB Support

set LegacyUSBSupport

Whether the system supports legacy USB devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—USB devices are only available to EFI applications.

  • Enabled—Legacy USB support is always available.

  • Auto—Disables legacy USB support if no USB devices are connected.

Port 60/64 Emulation

set UsbEmul6064

Whether the system supports 60h/64h emulation for complete USB keyboard legacy support. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—60h/64 emulation is not supported.

  • Enabled—60h/64 emulation is supported.

    You should select this option if you are using a non-USB aware operating system on the server.

All USB Devices

set AllUsbDevices

Whether all physical and virtual USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—All USB devices are disabled.

  • Enabled—All USB devices are enabled.

USB Port: Rear

set UsbPortRear

Whether the rear panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled—Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port: Internal

set UsbPortInt

Whether the internal USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled—Enables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port: KVM

set UsbPortKVM

Whether the vKVM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the vKVM keyboard and/or mouse devices. Keyboard and/or mouse will not work in the vKVM window.

  • Enabled—Enables the vKVM keyboard and/or mouse devices.

USB Port: vMedia

set UsbPortVMedia

Whether the virtual media devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the vMedia devices.

  • Enabled—Enables the vMedia devices.

xHCI Mode

set PchUsb30Mode

Whether the xHCI controller legacy support is enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the xHCI controller legacy support.

  • Enabled—Enables the xHCI controller legacy support.

PCI Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Memory Mapped I/O Above 4GB

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Whether to enable or disable MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

SR-IOV Support drop-down list

set SrIov

Whether SR-IOV (Single Root I/O Virtualization) is enabled or disabled on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—SR-IOV is disabled.

  • Enabled—SR-IOV is enabled.

Serial Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Out-of-Band Mgmt Port

set comSpcrEnable

Allows you to configure the COM port 0 that can be used for Windows Emergency Management services. ACPI SPCR table is reported based on this setup option. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Configures the COM port 0 as a general purpose port for use with the Windows Operating System.

  • Enabled—Configures the COM port 0 as a remote management port for Windows Emergency Management services.

Console Redirection

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the BIOS has booted and the operating system is responsible for the server, console redirection is irrelevant and has no effect. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

  • COM_0—Enables console redirection on COM port 0 during POST.

  • COM_1—Enables console redirection on COM port 1 during POST.

Terminal Type

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported vt100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100+—A supported vt100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Bits per second

set BaudRate

What BAUD rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9600—A 9,600 BAUD rate is used.

  • 19200—A 19,200 BAUD rate is used.

  • 38400—A 38,400 BAUD rate is used.

  • 57600—A 57,600 BAUD rate is used.

  • 115200—A 115,200 BAUD rate is used.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Flow Control

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • Hardware_RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Putty KeyPad

set PuttyFunctionKeyPad

Allows you to change the action of the PuTTY function keys and the top row of the numeric keypad. This can be one of the following:

  • VT100—The function keys generate ESC OP through ESC O[.

  • LINUX—Mimics the Linux virtual console. Function keys F6 to F12 behave like the default mode, but F1 to F5 generate ESC [[A through ESC [[E.

  • XTERMR6—Function keys F5 to F12 behave like the default mode. Function keys F1 to F4 generate ESC OP through ESC OS, which are the sequences produced by the top row of the keypad on Digital terminals.

  • SCO—The function keys F1 to F12 generate ESC [M through ESC [X. The function and shift keys generate ESC [Y through ESC [j. The control and function keys generate ESC [k through ESC [v. The shift, control and function keys generate ESC [w through ESC [{.

  • ESCN—The default mode. The function keys match the general behavior of Digital terminals. The function keys generate sequences such as ESC [11~ and ESC [12~.

  • VT400—The function keys behave like the default mode. The top row of the numeric keypad generates ESC OP through ESC OS.

Redirection After BIOS POST

set RedirectionAfterPOST

Whether BIOS console redirection should be active after BIOS POST is complete and control given to the OS bootloader. This can be one of the following:

  • Always_Enable—BIOS Legacy console redirection is active during the OS boot and run time.

  • Bootloader—BIOS Legacy console redirection is disabled before giving control to the OS boot loader.

LOM and PCIe Slots Configuration Parameters

Name Description

CDN Support for VIC

set CdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled.

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

    Note

     

    CDN support for VIC cards work with Windows 2012 or the latest OS only.

PCI ROM CLP

set PciRomClp

PCI ROM Command Line Protocol (CLP) controls the execution of different Option ROMs such as PxE and iSCSI that are present in the card. By default, it is disabled.

  • Enabled— Enables you to configure execution of different option ROMs such as PxE and iSCSI for an individual ports separately.

  • Disabled—The default option. You cannot choose different option ROMs. A default option ROM is executed during PCI enumeration.

PCH SATA Mode

set SataModeSelect

This options allows you to select the PCH SATA mode. This can be one of the following:

  • AHCI—Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to AHCI mode.

  • Disabled—Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

  • LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid

All Onboard LOM Ports

set AllLomPortControl

Whether all LOM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—All LOM ports are disabled.

  • Enabled—All LOM ports are enabled.

LOM Port n OptionROM

set LomOpromControlPortn

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—The Option ROM for slot n is available.

  • UEFI_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for UEFI only.

  • Legacy_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for legacy only.

All PCIe Slots OptionROM

set PcieOptionROMs

Whether the server can use Option ROM present in the PCIe Cards. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—The Option ROM for slot n is available.

  • UEFI_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for UEFI only.

  • Legacy_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for legacy only.

PCIe Slot:n OptionROM

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe Cards. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—The Option ROM for slot n is available.

  • UEFI_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for UEFI only.

  • Legacy_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for legacy only.

PCIe Slot:MLOM OptionROM

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:HBA OptionROM

set PcieSlotHBAOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:N1 OptionROM

set PcieSlotN1OptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:N2 OptionROM

set PcieSlotN2OptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:N2 OptionROM

set PcieSlotN2OptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:HBA Link Speed

PCIe SlotHBALinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto— System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

BIOS Configuration Dialog Box Button Bar


Important


The buttons in this dialog box affect all BIOS parameters on all available tabs, not just the parameters on the tab that you are viewing.


Name Description

Save Changes button

Saves the settings for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs and closes the dialog box.

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Reset Values button

Restores the values for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to the settings that were in effect when this dialog box was first opened.

Restore Defaults button

Sets the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to their default settings.

Cancel button

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.

Server Management Tab for C460 M4 Servers

Reboot Server Option

If you want your changes applied automatically after you click Save Changes, check the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC immediately reboots the server and applies your changes.

If you want to apply your changes at a later time, clear the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC stores the changes and applies them the next time the server reboots.


Note


If there are existing BIOS parameter changes pending, Cisco IMC automatically overwrites the stored values with the current settings when you click Save Changes.


Server Management BIOS Parameters

Name Description

FRB-2 Timer

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified by the set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeout command, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified by the set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy command.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

OS Watchdog Timer Policy

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Do_Nothing—The server takes no action if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Power_Down—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

BIOS Configuration Dialog Box Button Bar


Important


The buttons in this dialog box affect all BIOS parameters on all available tabs, not just the parameters on the tab that you are viewing.


Name Description

Save Changes button

Saves the settings for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs and closes the dialog box.

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Reset Values button

Restores the values for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to the settings that were in effect when this dialog box was first opened.

Restore Defaults button

Sets the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to their default settings.

Cancel button

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.

C220 M4 and C240 M4 Servers

Main Tab for C220M4 and C240M4 Servers

Main BIOS Parameters

Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

TPM Support

set TPMAdminCtrl

TPM (Trusted Platform Module) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. It can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

  • Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Note

 

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Power ON Password Support drop-down

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS. It can be one of the following:
  • Disabled—Support is disabled.

  • Enabled—Support is enabled.

Actions Area

Name Description

Save button

Saves the settings for the BIOS parameters and closes the dialog box.

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Reset button

Resets the values for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to the settings that were in effect when this dialog box was first opened.

Restore Defaults button

Sets the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to their default settings.

Advanced Tab for C220M4 and C240M4 Servers

Reboot Server Option

If you want your changes applied automatically after you click Save Changes, check the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC immediately reboots the server and applies your changes.

If you want to apply your changes at a later time, clear the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC stores the changes and applies them the next time the server reboots.


Note


If there are existing BIOS parameter changes pending, Cisco IMC automatically overwrites the stored values with the current settings when you click Save Changes.


Processor Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Intel Hyper-Threading Technology

set IntelHyperThread

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

  • Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Number of Enabled Cores

set CoreMultiProcessing

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

  • 1 through n—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Execute Disable

set ExecuteDisable

Classifies memory areas on the server to specify where application code can execute. As a result of this classification, the processor disables code execution if a malicious worm attempts to insert code in the buffer. This setting helps to prevent damage, worm propagation, and certain classes of malicious buffer overflow attacks. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not classify memory areas.

  • Enabled—The processor classifies memory areas.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Intel VT

set IntelVT

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

  • Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Note

 

If you change this option, you must power cycle the server before the setting takes effect.

Intel VT-d

set IntelVTD

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O (VT-d). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not use virtualization technology.

  • Enabled—The processor uses virtualization technology.

Intel VT-d Interrupt Remapping

set InterruptRemap

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Interrupt Remapping. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support remapping.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Interrupt Remapping as required.

Intel VT-d PassThrough DMA

set PassThroughDMA

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Pass-through DMA. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support pass-through DMA.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Pass-through DMA as required.

Intel VT-d Coherency Support

set CoherencySupport

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Coherency. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support coherency.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Coherency as required.

Intel VT-d ATS Support

set ATS

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Address Translation Services (ATS). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not support ATS.

  • Enabled—The processor uses VT-d ATS as required.

CPU Performance

set CPUPerformance

Sets the CPU performance profile for the server. The performance profile consists of the following options:

  • DCU Streamer Prefetcher

  • DCU IP Prefetcher

  • Hardware Prefetcher

  • Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch

This can be one of the following:

  • Enterprise—All options are enabled.

  • High_Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

  • HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

  • Custom—All performance profile options can be configured from the BIOS setup on the server. In addition, the Hardware Prefetcher and Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch options can be configured in the fields below.

Hardware Prefetcher

set HardwarePrefetch

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

  • Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher

set AdjacentCacheLinePrefetch

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even/odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

  • Enabled— The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

DCU Streamer Prefetch

set DcuStreamerPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

  • Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

DCU IP Prefetcher

set DcuIpPrefetch

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

  • Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Direct Cache Access Support

set DirectCacheAccess

Allows processors to increase I/O performance by placing data from I/O devices directly into the processor cache. This setting helps to reduce cache misses. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Data from I/O devices is not placed directly into the processor cache.

  • Enabled—Data from I/O devices is placed directly into the processor cache.

Power Technology

set CPUPowerManagement

Enables you to configure the CPU power management settings for the following options:

  • Enhanced Intel Speedstep Technology

  • Intel Turbo Boost Technology

  • Processor Power State C6

Power Technology can be one of the following:

  • Custom—The server uses the individual settings for the BIOS parameters mentioned above. You must select this option if you want to change any of these BIOS parameters.

  • Disabled—The server does not perform any CPU power management and any settings for the BIOS parameters mentioned above are ignored.

  • Energy_Efficient—The server determines the best settings for the BIOS parameters mentioned above and ignores the individual settings for these parameters.

Enhanced Intel Speedstep Technology

set EnhancedIntelSpeedStep

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Intel Turbo Boost Technology

set IntelTurboBoostTech

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

  • Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost Technology if required.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor C3 Report

set ProcessorC3Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C3 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C3 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—BIOS does not send C3 report.

  • Enabled—BIOS sends the C3 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C3 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor C6 Report

set ProcessorC6Report

Whether the BIOS sends the C6 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C6 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

  • Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Processor Power State C1 Enhanced

set ProcessorC1EReport

Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

  • Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

P-STATE Coordination

set PsdCoordType

Allows you to define how BIOS communicates the P-state support model to the operating system. There are 3 models as defined by the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) specification.

  • HW_ALL—The processor hardware is responsible for coordinating the P-state among logical processors with dependencies (all logical processors in a package).

  • SW_ALL—The OS Power Manager (OSPM) is responsible for coordinating the P-state among logical processors with dependencies (all logical processors in a physical package), and must initiate the transition on all of the logical processors.

  • SW_ANY—The OS Power Manager (OSPM) is responsible for coordinating the P-state among logical processors with dependencies (all logical processors in a package), and may initiate the transition on any of the logical processors in the domain.

Note

 

CPUPowerManagement must be set to Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Boot Performance Mode drop-down list

set BootPerformanceMode

Allows the user to select the BIOS performance state that is set before the operating system handoff. This can be one of the following:
  • Max Performance—Processor P-state ratio is maximum

  • Max Efficient— Processor P-state ratio is minimum

Energy Performance Tuning

set PwrPerfTuning

Allows you to choose BIOS or Operating System for energy performance bias tuning. This can be one of the following:

  • OS— Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

  • BIOS— Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

Energy Performance

set CpuEngPerfBias

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server. This can be one of the following:

  • Balanced_Energy

  • Balanced_Performance

  • Energy_Efficient

  • Performance

Package C State Limit

set PackageCStateLimit

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

  • C0_state—The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

  • C1_state—When the CPU is idle, the system slightly reduces the power consumption. This option requires less power than C0 and allows the server to return quickly to high performance mode.

  • C3_state—When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C1 option. This requires less power than C1 or C0, but it takes the server slightly longer to return to high performance mode.

  • C6_state—When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

  • C7_state—When the CPU is idle, the server makes a minimal amount of power available to the components. This option saves the maximum amount of power but it also requires the longest time for the server to return to high performance mode.

  • No_Limit—The server may enter any available C state.

Extended APIC

set LocalX2Apic

Allows you to enable or disable extended APIC support. This can be one of the following:

  • XAPIC—Enables APIC support.

  • X2APIC—Enables APIC and also enables Intel VT-d and Interrupt Remapping .

Workload Configuration

set WorkLdConfig

Allows you to set a parameter to optimize workload characterization. This can be one of the following:

  • Balanced— Chooses balanced option for optimization.

  • I/O Sensitive— Chooses I/O sensitive option for optimization.

Note

 

We recommend you to set the workload configuration to Balanced.

CPU HWPM drop-down list

set HWPMEnable

Enables the Hardware Power Management (HWPM) interface for better CPU performance and energy efficiency. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The P-States are controlled the same way as on predecessor processor generations.

  • Native Mode—HWPM works with the operating system through a software interface.

  • OOB Mode—The CPU autonomously controls its frequency based on the operating system energy efficiency.

CPU Autonomous Cstate drop-down list

set AutonumousCstateEnable

Enables CPU Autonomous C-State, which converts the HALT instructions to the MWAIT instructions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is disabled. This is the default value.

  • Enabled—CPU Autonomous C-state is enabled.

Processor CMCI drop-down list

set CmciEnable

Allows the CPU to trigger interrupts on corrected machine check events. The corrected machine check interrupt (CMCI) allows faster reaction than the traditional polling timer. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables CMCI.

  • Enabled—Enables CMCI. This is the default value.

Memory Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Select Memory RAS

set SelectMemoryRAS

How the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Maximum_Performance—System performance is optimized.

  • Mirroring—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

  • Lockstep—If the DIMM pairs in the server have an identical type, size, and organization and are populated across the SMI channels, you can enable lockstep mode to minimize memory access latency and provide better performance. This option offers better system performance than Mirroring and better reliability than Maximum Performance but lower reliability than Mirroring and lower system performance than Maximum Performance.

NUMA

set NUMAOptimize

Whether the BIOS supports Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA). This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The BIOS does not support NUMA.

  • Enabled—The BIOS includes the ACPI tables that are required for NUMA-aware operating systems. If you enable this option, the system must disable Inter-Socket Memory interleaving on some platforms.

Channel Interleaving

set ChannelInterLeave

Whether the CPU divides memory blocks and spreads contiguous portions of data across interleaved channels to enable simultaneous read operations. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines what interleaving is done.

  • 1_Way—Some channel interleaving is used.

  • 2_Way

  • 3_Way

  • 4_Way—The maximum amount of channel interleaving is used.

Rank Interleaving

set RankInterLeave

Whether the CPU interleaves physical ranks of memory so that one rank can be accessed while another is being refreshed. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines what interleaving is done.

  • 1_Way—Some rank interleaving is used.

  • 2_Way

  • 4_Way

  • 8_Way—The maximum amount of rank interleaving is used.

Patrol Scrub

set PatrolScrub

Whether the system actively searches for, and corrects, single bit memory errors even in unused portions of the memory on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The system checks for memory ECC errors only when the CPU reads or writes a memory address.

  • Enabled—The system periodically reads and writes memory searching for ECC errors. If any errors are found, the system attempts to fix them. This option may correct single bit errors before they become multi-bit errors, but it may adversely affect performance when the patrol scrub is running.

Demand Scrub

set DemandScrub

Whether the system corrects single bit memory errors encountered when the CPU or I/O makes a demand read. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— Single bit memory errors are not corrected.

  • Enabled— Single bit memory errors are corrected in memory and the corrected data is set in response to the demand read.

Altitude

set Altitude

The approximate number of meters above sea level at which the physical server is installed. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines the physical elevation.

  • 300_M—The server is approximately 300 meters above sea level.

  • 900_M—The server is approximately 900 meters above sea level.

  • 1500_M—The server is approximately 1500 meters above sea level.

  • 3000_M—The server is approximately 3000 meters above sea level.

Panic and High Watermark drop-down list

PanicHighWatermark

When set to low, the memory controller does not postpone refreshes while Memory Refresh Rate is set to 1X Refresh.

This can be one of the following:

  • Low—Refresh rate is set to low.

  • High —Refresh rate is set to high.

QPI Configuration Parameters

Name Description

QPI Link Frequency Select

set QPILinkFrequency

The Intel QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) link frequency, in gigatransfers per second (GT/s). This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU determines the QPI link frequency.

  • 6.4_GT/s

  • 7.2_GT/s

  • 8.0_GT/s

QPI Snoop Mode

set QpiSnoopMode

The Intel QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) snoop mode. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto—The CPU automatically recognizes this as Early Snoop mode.

  • Early Snoop—The distributed cache ring stops can send a snoop probe or a request to another caching agent directly. This mode has lower latency and it is best for workloads that have shared data sets across threads and can benefit from a cache-to-cache transfer, or for workloads that are not NUMA optimized.

  • Home Snoop—The snoop is always spawned by the home agent (centralized ring stop) for the memory controller. This mode has a higher local latency than early snoop, but it provides extra resources for a larger number of outstanding transactions.

  • Home Directory Snoop— The home directory is an optional enabled feature that is implemented at both the HA and iMC logic in the processor. The goal of the directory is to filter snoops to the remote sockets and a node controller in scalable platforms and 2S and 4S configurations.

  • Home Directory Snoop with OSB— In the Opportunistic Snoop Broadcast (OSB) directory mode, the HA could choose to do speculative home snoop broadcast under very lightly loaded conditions even before the directory information has been collected and checked.

  • Cluster on Die—Enables Cluster On Die. When enabled LLC is split into two parts with an independent caching agent for each. This helps increase the performance in some workloads. This mode is available only for processors that have 10 or more cores. It is the best mode for highly NUMA optimized workloads.

USB Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Legacy USB Support

set LegacyUSBSupport

Whether the system supports legacy USB devices. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—USB devices are only available to EFI applications.

  • Enabled—Legacy USB support is always available.

  • Auto—Disables legacy USB support if no USB devices are connected.

Port 60/64 Emulation

set UsbEmul6064

Whether the system supports 60h/64h emulation for complete USB keyboard legacy support. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—60h/64 emulation is not supported.

  • Enabled—60h/64 emulation is supported.

    You should select this option if you are using a non-USB aware operating system on the server.

xHCI Mode

set PchUsb30Mode

Whether the xHCI controller legacy support is enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the xHCI controller legacy support.

  • Enabled—Enables the xHCI controller legacy support.

xHCI Legacy Support drop-down list

set UsbXhciSupport

Whether the system supports legacy xHCI controller. This can be one of the following:
  • Disabled—Disables xHCI legacy support.

  • Enabled—Enables xHCI legacy support. This is the default value.

All USB Devices

set AllUsbDevices

Whether all physical and virtual USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—All USB devices are disabled.

  • Enabled—All USB devices are enabled.

USB Port: Rear

set UsbPortRear

Whether the rear panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled—Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port: Front

set UsbPortFront

Whether the front panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:
  • Disabled—Disables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system

  • Enabled—Enables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port: Internal

set UsbPortInt

Whether the internal USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

  • Enabled—Enables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port: KVM

set UsbPortKVM

Whether the vKVM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the vKVM keyboard and/or mouse devices. Keyboard and/or mouse will not work in the vKVM window.

  • Enabled—Enables the vKVM keyboard and/or mouse devices.

USB Port: vMedia

set UsbPortVMedia

Whether the virtual media devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Disables the vMedia devices.

  • Enabled—Enables the vMedia devices.

PCI Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Memory Mapped I/O Above 4GB

set MemoryMappedIOAbove4GB

Whether to enable or disable MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The server does not map I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

  • Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

 

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Sriov

set SrIov

Whether SR-IOV (Single Root I/O Virtualization) is enabled or disabled on the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—SR-IOV is disabled.

  • Enabled—SR-IOV is enabled.

ASPM Support drop-down list

set ASPMSupport

Allows you to set the level of ASPM (Active Power State Management) support in the BIOS. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—ASPM support is disabled in the BIOS.

  • Force L0s—Force all links to L0 standby (L0s) state.

  • Auto—The CPU determines the power state

NVMe SSD Hot-Plug Support drop-down list

set PCIeSSDHotPlugSupport

Allows you to replace an NVMe SSD without powering down the server. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—NVMe SSD hot-plug support is disabled. This is the default value.

  • Enabled—NVMe SSD hot-plug support is enabled.

VGA Priority drop-down list

set VgaPriority

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

  • Onboard—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

  • Offboard—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

  • Onboard VGA Disabled—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled.

Serial Configuration Parameters

Name Description

Out-of-Band Mgmt Port

set comSpcrEnable

Allows you to configure the COM port 0 that can be used for Windows Emergency Management services. ACPI SPCR table is reported based on this setup option. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—Configures the COM port 0 as a general purpose port for use with the Windows Operating System.

  • Enabled—Configures the COM port 0 as a remote management port for Windows Emergency Management services.

Console Redirection

set ConsoleRedir

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the BIOS has booted and the operating system is responsible for the server, console redirection is irrelevant and has no effect. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—No console redirection occurs during POST.

  • COM_0—Enables console redirection on COM port 0 during POST.

  • COM_1—Enables console redirection on COM port 1 during POST.

Terminal Type

set TerminalType

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

  • PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

  • VT100—A supported vt100 video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT100+—A supported vt100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

  • VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Bits per second

set BaudRate

What BAUD rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

  • 9600—A 9,600 BAUD rate is used.

  • 19200—A 19,200 BAUD rate is used.

  • 38400—A 38,400 BAUD rate is used.

  • 57600—A 57,600 BAUD rate is used.

  • 115200—A 115,200 BAUD rate is used.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Flow Control

set FlowCtrl

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

  • None—No flow control is used.

  • Hardware_RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

 

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Putty KeyPad

set PuttyFunctionKeyPad

Allows you to change the action of the PuTTY function keys and the top row of the numeric keypad. This can be one of the following:

  • VT100—The function keys generate ESC OP through ESC O[.

  • LINUX—Mimics the Linux virtual console. Function keys F6 to F12 behave like the default mode, but F1 to F5 generate ESC [[A through ESC [[E.

  • XTERMR6—Function keys F5 to F12 behave like the default mode. Function keys F1 to F4 generate ESC OP through ESC OS, which are the sequences produced by the top row of the keypad on Digital terminals.

  • SCO—The function keys F1 to F12 generate ESC [M through ESC [X. The function and shift keys generate ESC [Y through ESC [j. The control and function keys generate ESC [k through ESC [v. The shift, control and function keys generate ESC [w through ESC [{.

  • ESCN—The default mode. The function keys match the general behavior of Digital terminals. The function keys generate sequences such as ESC [11~ and ESC [12~.

  • VT400—The function keys behave like the default mode. The top row of the numeric keypad generates ESC OP through ESC OS.

Redirection After BIOS POST

set RedirectionAfterPOST

Whether BIOS console redirection should be active after BIOS POST is complete and control given to the OS bootloader. This can be one of the following:

  • Always_Enable—BIOS Legacy console redirection is active during the OS boot and run time.

  • Bootloader—BIOS Legacy console redirection is disabled before giving control to the OS boot loader.

LOM and PCIe Slots Configuration Parameters

Name Description

CDN Support for VIC

set CdnEnable

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled.

  • Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

    Note

     

    CDN support for VIC cards work with Windows 2012 or the latest OS only.

PCI ROM CLP

set PciRomClp

PCI ROM Command Line Protocol (CLP) controls the execution of different Option ROMs such as PxE and iSCSI that are present in the card. By default, it is disabled.

  • Enabled— Enables you to configure execution of different option ROMs such as PxE and iSCSI for an individual ports separately.

  • Disabled—The default option. You cannot choose different option ROMs. A default option ROM is executed during PCI enumeration.

PCH SATA Mode

set SataModeSelect

This options allows you to select the PCH SATA mode. This can be one of the following:

  • AHCI—Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to AHCI mode.

  • Disabled—Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

  • LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid

All Onboard LOM Ports

set AllLomPortControl

Whether all LOM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—All LOM ports are disabled.

  • Enabled—All LOM ports are enabled.

LOM Port n OptionROM

set LomOpromControlPortn

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port designated by n. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—The Option ROM for slot n is available.

  • UEFI_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for UEFI only.

  • Legacy_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for legacy only.

All PCIe Slots OptionROM

set PcieOptionROMs

Whether the server can use Option ROM present in the PCIe Cards. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—The Option ROM for slot n is available.

  • UEFI_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for UEFI only.

  • Legacy_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for legacy only.

PCIe Slot:n OptionROM

set PcieSlotnOptionROM

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe Cards. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The Option ROM for slot n is not available.

  • Enabled—The Option ROM for slot n is available.

  • UEFI_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for UEFI only.

  • Legacy_Only—The Option ROM for slot n is available for legacy only.

PCIe Slot:MLOM OptionROM

set PcieSlotMLOMOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:HBA OptionROM

set PcieSlotHBAOptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:N1 OptionROM

set PcieSlotN1OptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:N2 OptionROM

set PcieSlotN2OptionROM

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Enabled—Executes both legacy and UEFI Option ROM.

  • Disabled—Both legacy and UEFI Option ROM will not be executed.

  • UEFI Only—Executes only UEFI Option ROM.

  • Legacy Only—Executes only Legacy Option ROM.

PCIe Slot:HBA Link Speed

PCIe SlotHBALinkSpeed

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

  • Auto— System selects the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

  • Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

BIOS Configuration Dialog Box Button Bar


Important


The buttons in this dialog box affect all BIOS parameters on all available tabs, not just the parameters on the tab that you are viewing.


Name Description

Save Changes button

Saves the settings for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs and closes the dialog box.

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Reset Values button

Restores the values for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to the settings that were in effect when this dialog box was first opened.

Restore Defaults button

Sets the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to their default settings.

Cancel button

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.

Server Management Tab for C220M4 and C240M4 Servers

Reboot Server Option

If you want your changes applied automatically after you click Save Changes, check the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC immediately reboots the server and applies your changes.

If you want to apply your changes at a later time, clear the Reboot Host Immediately check box. Cisco IMC stores the changes and applies them the next time the server reboots.


Note


If there are existing BIOS parameter changes pending, Cisco IMC automatically overwrites the stored values with the current settings when you click Save Changes.


Server Management BIOS Parameters

Name Description

FRB-2 Timer

set FRB-2

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

  • Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

OS Watchdog Timer

set OSBootWatchdogTimer

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

  • Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

  • Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified by the set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeout command, the Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified by the set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy command.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout

set OSBootWatchdogTimerTimeOut

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

  • 5_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 10_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 10 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 15_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 15 minutes after it begins to boot.

  • 20_Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

OS Watchdog Timer Policy

set OSBootWatchdogTimerPolicy

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

  • Do_Nothing—The server takes no action if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Power_Down—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

  • Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

 

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

BIOS Configuration Dialog Box Button Bar


Important


The buttons in this dialog box affect all BIOS parameters on all available tabs, not just the parameters on the tab that you are viewing.


Name Description

Save Changes button

Saves the settings for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs and closes the dialog box.

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Reset Values button

Restores the values for the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to the settings that were in effect when this dialog box was first opened.

Restore Defaults button

Sets the BIOS parameters on all three tabs to their default settings.

Cancel button

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.